WO2025218019A1 - Camera module and electronic device - Google Patents
Camera module and electronic deviceInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025218019A1 WO2025218019A1 PCT/CN2024/102650 CN2024102650W WO2025218019A1 WO 2025218019 A1 WO2025218019 A1 WO 2025218019A1 CN 2024102650 W CN2024102650 W CN 2024102650W WO 2025218019 A1 WO2025218019 A1 WO 2025218019A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- lens
- shake
- camera module
- bracket
- prism
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/55—Optical parts specially adapted for electronic image sensors; Mounting thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/54—Mounting of pick-up tubes, electronic image sensors, deviation or focusing coils
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/57—Mechanical or electrical details of cameras or camera modules specially adapted for being embedded in other devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/67—Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/68—Control of cameras or camera modules for stable pick-up of the scene, e.g. compensating for camera body vibrations
- H04N23/682—Vibration or motion blur correction
- H04N23/685—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of photographing equipment, and in particular to a camera module and electronic equipment.
- telephoto and macro camera modules have become an essential component of electronic devices.
- the structural design of existing telephoto and macro camera modules is irrational, resulting in a large range of movement when the motor drives the lens to focus.
- the present application provides a camera module and electronic equipment with a smaller movement range during focusing.
- the present application provides a camera module.
- the camera module includes a motor, a first lens, a second lens, a prism assembly and an image sensor assembly.
- the first lens and the second lens are mounted on the motor;
- the prism assembly includes an incident surface and an exit surface.
- the incident surface of the prism assembly is arranged facing the first lens, and the exit surface of the prism is arranged facing the image sensor assembly; after the light enters the camera module, it passes through the second lens, the first lens and the incident surface of the prism assembly in sequence and then enters the prism assembly.
- the motor After the light is reflected multiple times inside the prism assembly, it is emitted from the exit surface of the prism assembly and is imaged on the image sensor assembly; the motor includes a base, an anti-shake drive mechanism, and a plurality of lens elements.
- the invention relates to a lens assembly comprising a structure, an anti-shake bracket, a focus bracket and a focus driving mechanism, the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base, and the focus bracket is movably connected to the anti-shake bracket; the first lens is fixed to the anti-shake bracket, and the second lens is fixed to the focus bracket.
- the anti-shake driving mechanism is used to drive the anti-shake bracket to drive the first lens, the focus bracket and the second lens to move relative to the base along the first direction and/or the second direction
- the focus driving mechanism is used to drive the focus bracket to drive the second lens to move relative to the anti-shake bracket along the third direction, so that the second lens is close to or away from the first lens, wherein the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are different from each other.
- the motor can achieve optical image stabilization by controlling the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction.
- the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction can be controlled by the motor to offset the shaking stroke of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction, so as to avoid or reduce the position offset of the first lens and the second lens caused by the shaking.
- the camera module of the present application can achieve optical image stabilization of the camera module by controlling the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction by the motor, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module.
- the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, while the second lens moves along the third direction to achieve autofocus.
- the camera module's structural configuration is relatively reasonable, so the movement distance of the second lens along the third direction is the camera module's focus stroke. Because the second lens's movement distance is relatively short, the camera module's focus stroke is also relatively short, and the camera module's space requirement in the third direction is also relatively small, enabling a compact camera module.
- grouping the first lens and the second lens of the camera module can avoid the anti-shake and image rotation problems of the camera module, and the user's focusing experience is better.
- the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, the second lens moves away from the first lens along the third direction, and the distance between the first lens and the second lens increases; during the focusing process of the camera module from a close view to a distant view, the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, the second lens moves closer to the first lens along the third direction, and the distance between the first lens and the second lens decreases.
- the second lens moves toward the image side of the camera module in the third direction, changing the focal length of the camera module, thereby enabling the camera module to focus and shoot in the telephoto state.
- the second lens moves toward the object side of the camera module in the third direction, changing the focal length of the camera module, thereby enabling the camera module to focus and shoot in macro state.
- the anti-shake bracket includes a mounting hole
- the focus bracket includes a mounting space
- the mounting hole and the mounting space are arranged relative to each other; the first lens is fixed in the mounting hole of the anti-shake bracket, and the second lens is fixed in the mounting space of the focus bracket.
- the optical axis of the first lens is roughly parallel to the optical axis of the second lens.
- the optical axis directions of the first lens and the second lens can be roughly parallel to the third direction, that is, the optical axis directions of the first lens and the second lens can be roughly parallel to the thickness direction of the electronic device.
- the diameters of the first lens and the second lens are not limited by the thickness of the electronic device, and there is no need to cut the lens into a specific diameter range in the thickness direction of the electronic device.
- the first lens and the second lens are roughly parallel to the third direction and the thickness direction of the electronic device.
- the camera module is symmetrical in the third direction and has no problems of imaging ST separation and poor resolution.
- a fixing block is protruded from a wall of the mounting hole of the anti-shake bracket; the first lens is fixed to the fixing block and is at least partially located on a side of the fixing block facing the base.
- the first lens is fixedly connected to the fixing block to achieve a fixed connection with the anti-shake bracket, and the connection with the anti-shake bracket is more reliable.
- the mounting hole forms a first opening on the anti-shake bracket, and the first lens does not extend out of the first opening.
- the first lens has negative optical power
- the second lens has positive optical power
- the optical focal length of the first lens and the second lens by reasonably configuring the optical focal length of the first lens and the second lens and setting the first lens and the second lens to have opposite optical focal lengths, it is beneficial to achieve focusing and macro focusing, reduce the focusing stroke, improve the focusing ability, and help improve the overall image quality of the camera module when imaging in close-up, increase the amount of light entering the system, promote macro imaging, and balance the difference in imaging quality between long-range shooting and close-up shooting. When shooting objects at different distances, the image quality is good and the imaging clarity is high.
- the second lens includes a first lens and a second lens
- the first lens includes a third lens
- the first lens, the second lens and the third lens are arranged in sequence, the first lens has positive optical power, the second lens has negative optical power, and the third lens has negative optical power.
- the focal length f1 of the first lens of the camera module and the effective focal length EFL of the camera module satisfy: f1/EFL>-1.
- the focal length f2 of the second lens of the camera module and the effective focal length EFL of the camera module satisfy: f2/EFL ⁇ 0.9.
- the camera module can balance the image quality differences between the long-range and close-range shooting of the camera module at a smaller assembly sensitivity, thereby obtaining more uniform image quality.
- the optical focal length of the first lens and the second lens can be reasonably configured, which is conducive to shortening the focusing stroke of the camera module, improving the focusing ability of the camera module, and realizing the shooting of the camera module in a macro state, so as to have good image quality and high imaging clarity when shooting objects at different distances.
- the second lens includes at least one lens with an Abbe number less than 40.
- the second lens can include at least one lens with high dispersion.
- the Abbe number of at least one lens in the second lens is beneficial to reduce the chromatic aberration in the camera module, so that the camera module has good imaging quality.
- the camera module satisfies: FOV ⁇ 50°, where FOV is the field of view angle of the camera module when the object distance is infinite.
- the camera module has a telephoto characteristic.
- the camera module satisfies: Fno ⁇ 3.6, where Fno is the aperture number of the camera module.
- the camera module has the characteristic of a large aperture.
- the motor also includes a guide bracket, multiple first connecting members, and multiple second connecting members.
- the guide bracket is located between the anti-shake bracket and the base.
- the guide bracket is connected to the base through multiple first connecting members, and is connected to the anti-shake bracket through multiple second connecting members, so that the relative movement direction between the anti-shake bracket and the guide bracket is different from the relative movement direction between the guide bracket and the base.
- the guide bracket can ensure the connection reliability of the anti-shake bracket and the base, can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guidance, and ensure the stability of the relative position of the first anti-shake coil and the first anti-shake magnetic part and the relative position of the second anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake magnetic part.
- the motor can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base, the first connecting part, the guide bracket, the second connecting part and the anti-shake bracket, thereby solving the problem of excessive lens tilt when the traditional motor performs optical image stabilization, and making the optical image stabilization movement of the camera module smooth and reliable.
- the base includes multiple first grooves
- the guide bracket includes multiple second grooves and multiple third grooves
- the anti-shake bracket includes multiple fourth grooves
- multiple first connecting members are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple first grooves and the multiple second grooves, and at least part of the first connecting members is located in the first groove of the base, and at least part of it is located in the second groove of the guide bracket
- multiple second connecting members are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple third grooves and the multiple fourth grooves, and at least part of the second connecting members is located in the third groove of the guide bracket, and at least part of it is located in the fourth groove of the anti-shake bracket.
- first groove can limit and guide the first connecting member, allowing the first connecting member to move in the second direction within the second groove. Therefore, the guide bracket can also slide relative to the base in a direction parallel to the second direction.
- the third groove can limit and guide the second connecting member, allowing the second connecting member to move in the first direction within the fourth groove. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket can slide relative to the base in a direction parallel to the first direction.
- the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base via a rolling member.
- the solution in which the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base through a rolling member has a simpler structure, thereby realizing the miniaturization of the motor and the camera module.
- the base includes a first rolling groove
- the anti-shake bracket includes a second rolling groove; at least part of the rolling element is located in the first rolling groove of the base, and at least part of the rolling element is located in the second rolling groove of the anti-shake bracket.
- the rolling element can roll in the first and/or second directions within the first rolling groove, and the second rolling groove of the anti-shake bracket can limit the rolling element. It is also understood that the anti-shake bracket and the rolling element can move together in any direction relative to the base on a single plane, making the relative movement between the anti-shake bracket and the base more controllable.
- the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a first anti-shake coil, a first anti-shake magnetic component, a second anti-shake coil and a second anti-shake magnetic component.
- the first anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake coil are fixed to the base, and the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component are fixed to the anti-shake bracket; the first anti-shake coil is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component to drive the anti-shake bracket to move in a first direction relative to the base, and the second anti-shake coil is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component to drive the anti-shake bracket to move in a second direction relative to the base.
- the anti-shake bracket can drive the first lens to move relative to the base in the first direction and/or the second direction, thereby realizing the movement of the first lens in the -plane.
- the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a first anti-shake sensor, which is fixed to the base and located on the inner side of the first anti-shake coil, and is used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket in the first direction; the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a second anti-shake sensor, which is fixed to the base and located on the inner side of the second anti-shake coil, and is used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket in the second direction.
- first anti-shake sensor and the second anti-shake sensor can detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket, and the camera module can adjust the position of the anti-shake bracket according to the detection results, so as to achieve a better optical anti-shake effect.
- the motor also includes a focusing circuit board, which is fixed to the anti-shake bracket;
- the focusing drive mechanism includes a focusing coil and a focusing magnetic part, the focusing coil is fixed to the focusing circuit board, and the focusing magnetic part is fixed to the focusing bracket, and the focusing coil is arranged facing the focusing magnetic part to drive the focusing bracket to move along a third direction relative to the anti-shake bracket.
- the focusing coil and the focusing magnetic part drive the focusing bracket to move along the third direction, thereby driving the second lens to move along the third direction, thereby realizing the automatic focus of the camera module.
- the relative distance between the first lens and the second lens in the third direction will change, and a smaller distance change can achieve a larger focal length change, which is beneficial to improving the focusing ability of the camera module.
- the second lens with a shorter focusing stroke can realize the automatic focus of the motor in the macro state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module in the macro state.
- the incident surface and the exit surface are located on the same side of the prism assembly.
- the light can be reflected at least three times in the prism assembly, and the camera module has a longer optical path, which is conducive to shooting in the telephoto state of the camera module.
- the incident surface and the exit surface are located on different sides of the prism assembly.
- the light can be reflected at least twice in the prism assembly, and the camera module has a longer optical path, which is more conducive to shooting in the telephoto state of the camera module.
- the prism assembly includes a prism and a prism bracket, and the prism is mounted on the prism bracket;
- the prism includes a first surface, a second surface, a first side surface and a second side surface, the first side surface and the second side surface are connected to the first surface and the second surface, and the first surface and the second surface are arranged back to back;
- the prism assembly also includes a light-shielding plate, which is fixed to the first surface of the prism, and the light-shielding plate separates the first surface to form an incident surface and an exit surface.
- the reflected light path inside the prism assembly is longer, which meets the telephoto characteristics of the camera module and improves the telephoto shooting performance of the camera module.
- the prism assembly includes a prism and a prism holder, and the prism is mounted on the prism holder;
- the prism includes a first surface, a second surface, a first side surface and a second side surface, the first side surface and the second side surface are connected to the first surface and the second surface, the first surface and the second surface are arranged back to back, and the first side surface and the second side surface are arranged back to back; a portion of the first surface forms an incident surface, and a portion of the second surface forms an exit surface.
- the light after entering the prism, the light can be refracted at least four times inside the prism.
- the optical path of the camera module is larger, which can achieve shooting in the telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module in the telephoto state.
- the present application provides an electronic device, which includes a housing and the aforementioned camera module, wherein the camera module is disposed in the housing.
- the electronic device has a more reasonable structural configuration, and when shooting, the electronic device has better optical image stabilization and autofocus performance, providing a better user experience.
- the camera module has a shorter focus stroke, and the camera module has a smaller size requirement in the thickness direction of the electronic device, which is conducive to the thinning of the electronic device.
- FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electronic device shown in FIG1 taken along line A-A;
- FIG3 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG1 in one embodiment
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the camera module shown in FIG3 in one embodiment
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the motor shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG6 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG7 is a schematic structural diagram of the base shown in FIG6 at another angle
- FIG8 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG9 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG10 is an enlarged structural schematic diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG11 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG10 at another angle
- FIG12 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG13 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the motor shown in FIG12 taken along line B-B;
- FIG14 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG14 at another angle
- FIG16 is a fourth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG17 is a fifth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG18 is a partial structural assembly diagram 1 of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG19 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG18 taken along line C-C;
- FIG20 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG18 taken along line D-D;
- FIG21 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the focusing circuit board shown in FIG5 at another angle;
- FIG22 is a sixth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG23 is a seventh diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment
- FIG24 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG25 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG24 taken along line E-E;
- FIG26 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG24 taken along line F-F;
- FIG27 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG28 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the housing shown in FIG5 at another angle
- FIG29 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line G-G;
- FIG30 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG31 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the prism assembly shown in FIG30 in one embodiment
- FIG32 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket shown in FIG30 at another angle;
- FIG33 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line H-H;
- FIG34 is an exploded schematic diagram of the image sensor assembly shown in FIG4 in one embodiment
- FIG35 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly shown in FIG4 taken along line I-I;
- FIG36 is a second partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line H-H;
- FIG37 is a structural diagram of the camera module provided by the first embodiment of the present application in a long-range working state when the object distance is infinite;
- FIG38 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG37 in a close-up working state during macro shooting;
- FIG39 is a structural diagram of a camera module provided by a second embodiment of the present application in a long-range working state when the object distance is infinite;
- FIG40 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG39 in a close-up working state during macro shooting
- FIG41 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG3 in another embodiment
- FIG42 is an exploded view of a portion of the camera module shown in FIG41 in one embodiment
- FIG43 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base shown in FIG42 in one embodiment
- FIG44 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the motor shown in FIG42 in one embodiment
- FIG45 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG42 in one embodiment
- FIG46 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG45 at another angle
- FIG47 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module shown in FIG41 in one embodiment
- FIG48 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line J-J;
- FIG49 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line K-K;
- FIG50 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line L-L;
- FIG51 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG42 in one embodiment
- FIG52 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG3 in yet another embodiment
- FIG56 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG52 taken along line M-M;
- Figure 58 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
- the object side is the side where the scene to be imaged is located.
- the image side is the side where the image of the scene to be imaged is located, with the lens as the boundary.
- the object side with the lens as the boundary, the side where the object is located is the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side, also known as the object plane.
- the image side with the lens as the boundary, the side where the image of the object is located is called the image side, and the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side, also known as the image plane.
- the optical axis is a ray of light that passes perpendicularly through the center of an ideal lens.
- the optical axis is a ray of light that passes perpendicularly through the center of an ideal lens.
- all rays converge at a single point behind the lens. This point is the focal point.
- Focal length also known as focal length, is a measure of the convergence or divergence of light in an optical system. It is the vertical distance from the optical center of a lens or lens group to the focal plane, when a sharp image of an infinitely distant object is formed on the focal plane.
- the focal length is the distance from the lens center to the image plane.
- the focal length is equal to the effective focal length, which is the distance from the rear principal plane of the lens or lens group to the image plane.
- Effective focal length is defined as the distance from the center of the camera module to the focal point.
- Focal power defined as the difference between the image-side beam convergence and the object-side beam convergence, is the reciprocal of the focal length of the lens. It characterizes the ability of an optical system to deflect light.
- Positive optical power also called positive refractive power, means that the lens has a positive focal length and can focus light.
- Negative optical power also known as negative refractive power, means that the lens has a negative focal length and can diverge light.
- the aperture is a device used to control the amount of light that passes through the lens and enters the photosensitive surface inside the camera body. It is usually inside the lens.
- Aperture number also known as F number (Fno) is the relative value obtained by dividing the focal length of the lens by the diameter of the lens entrance pupil (the inverse of the relative aperture). The smaller the aperture, the more light enters in the same unit time. The larger the aperture value, the smaller the depth of field, and the background content in the photo will be blurred, similar to the effect of a telephoto lens.
- the field of view is the angle between the two edges of the maximum range through which the image of the measured object can pass, with the lens as the vertex.
- the field of view determines the visual range of the optical instrument.
- a larger field of view means a wider field of view and a smaller optical magnification.
- the image height (Imaging Height, IH) of the imaging surface represents half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area on the photosensitive chip, which is also the radius of the imaging circle.
- the Abbe number also known as the dispersion coefficient, is the difference ratio of the refractive index of an optical material at different wavelengths, representing the degree of dispersion of the material.
- the refractive index (Nd) is defined as the absolute value of the ratio of the propagation speed of electromagnetic waves (including visible light) to the speed of light in a vacuum when propagating in a material. It is an indicator that describes the propagation speed and bending degree of light in a material.
- connection can mean a removable or non-removable connection; a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediary; an electrical connection or a mechanical connection.
- a “fixed connection” refers to a connection in which the relative positional relationship remains unchanged after connection.
- a “movable connection” refers to a connection in which the connection enables relative movement.
- a “sliding connection” refers to a connection in which the connection enables relative sliding.
- the limitations of the relative position relationship mentioned are all for the current state of the art, rather than absolutely strict limitations, and a small amount of deviation is allowed, and it is possible to be approximately parallel, approximately perpendicular, approximately aligned, etc.
- a and B are parallel, which means that A and B are parallel or approximately parallel, and the angle between A and B can be between 0 degrees and 10 degrees.
- a and B are perpendicular, which means that A and B are perpendicular or approximately perpendicular, and the angle between A and B can be between 80 degrees and 100 degrees.
- FIG2 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electronic device 1000 shown in FIG1 at line A-A.
- screen 300 is mounted on housing 200 and, together with housing 200, encloses the interior of electronic device 1000.
- the interior of electronic device 1000 can be used to house components of electronic device 1000, such as a battery, receiver, or microphone.
- Screen 300 can be either flat or curved.
- the camera module 100 can be located inside the electronic device 1000.
- the housing 200 has a light-transmitting portion 201.
- the shape of the light-transmitting portion 201 is not limited to the circular shape shown in FIG1 , but can also be an elliptical or irregular shape.
- Light from outside the electronic device 1000 can enter the interior of the electronic device 1000 through the light-transmitting portion 201.
- the camera module 100 can collect light entering the interior of the electronic device 1000.
- the light-transmitting portion 201 can be a light-transmitting hole or a transparent portion in the housing 200. This application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the light-transmitting portion 201.
- the camera module 100 includes a motor 1, a first lens 2, a second lens 3, a prism assembly 4, and an image sensor assembly 5. It is understood that the camera module 100 may also include fewer or more structures. For example, the camera module 100 may also include a variable aperture (not shown in the figures).
- the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 may be mounted on the motor 1 .
- the motor 1 can achieve optical image stabilization by controlling the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move along a plane perpendicular to the third direction Z (that is, the X-Y plane).
- the movement of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane can be controlled by the motor 1 to offset the shaking stroke of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane, so as to avoid or reduce the position offset of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 caused by shaking.
- the camera module 100 of the present application can control the movement of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane by the motor 1 to achieve optical image stabilization (OIS) of the camera module 100 and improve the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- OIS optical image stabilization
- the motor 1 has an escape space 1a, which can connect the inside of the motor 1 to the outside of the motor 1.
- the prism assembly 4 includes a prism 41 and a prism bracket 42 , and the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42 .
- the prism 41 has an incident surface S7 and an exit surface S11.
- the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the same side of the prism 41. In other embodiments, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may also be located on different sides of the prism 41.
- the prism assembly 4 can be located in the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1. In this way, on the one hand, the prism assembly 4 can better utilize the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1, thereby improving the space utilization rate of the motor 1. On the other hand, the prism assembly 4 and the motor are arranged more compactly, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the camera module 100. In addition, at least a portion of the motor 1 is arranged relative to the incident surface S7 of the prism 41, so that light passing through the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can enter the prism 41.
- the image sensor assembly 5 is disposed opposite to the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 , so that light passing through the prism 41 can enter the image sensor assembly 5 .
- light enters the camera module 100 from the light-transmitting portion 201 of the electronic device 1000, passes through the second lens 3, the first lens 2, and the incident surface S7 of the prism 41, and then enters the interior of the prism 41. After being reflected at least three times inside the prism 41, the light passes through the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 and reaches the image sensor assembly 5.
- the image sensor assembly 5 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal.
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the motor 1 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
- motor 1 exemplarily includes an anti-shake module 1b and a focus module 1c.
- the anti-shake module 1b drives the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 for optical image stabilization, while the focus module 1c drives the second lens 3 for autofocus.
- the anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c can form an integrated structure.
- the anti-shake module 1b includes a base 11, a motor circuit board 12, a first connecting member 131, a second connecting member 132, a third connecting member 133, an anti-shake driving mechanism 14, a guide bracket 15, and an anti-shake bracket 16.
- the anti-shake driving mechanism 14 includes a first anti-shake coil 141, a first anti-shake magnetic member 142, a second anti-shake coil 143, and a second anti-shake magnetic member 144.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake The magnetic members 142 are arranged in a corresponding manner to form a drive mechanism, and the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 are arranged in a corresponding manner to form another drive mechanism.
- the number of first connecting members 131 and second connecting members 132 can be multiple, for example, three are used in this embodiment.
- the number of third connecting members 133 can be multiple, for example, two are used in this embodiment.
- the focus module 1 c includes a focus bracket 21 , a focus drive mechanism 22 , and a focus circuit board 23 .
- the focus drive mechanism 22 includes a focus coil 221 and a focus magnetic member 222 .
- the motor 1 may further include a pressing piece 17 and a housing 18 .
- Fig. 6 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in Fig. 5 in one embodiment.
- Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in Fig. 6 at another angle.
- the base 11 exemplarily includes a bottom 111 and a side portion 112.
- the side portion 112 can be fixedly connected to the bottom 111 and is substantially perpendicular to the bottom 111.
- the bottom 111 of the base 11 may include a first corner 1111, a second corner 1112, a third corner 1113, a first side 1114, and a second side 1115.
- the first side 1114 and the second side 1115 may be arranged at an angle.
- the base 11 includes a plurality of first grooves 113.
- the number of the first grooves 113 can be three, and the three first grooves 113 can be respectively located at the first corner 1111, the second corner 1112, and the third corner 1113 of the bottom 111.
- the bottom 111 of the base 11 has a light-through hole 1116
- the side 112 of the base 11 includes an avoidance hole 1121 .
- the light-through hole 1116 of the bottom 111 is connected to the avoidance hole 1121 of the side 112 .
- the base 11 may include a metal part and an insulating part formed into an integral structure with the base 11 by insert-molding or the like. In this way, the overall strength of the base 11 is better.
- FIG8 is a first partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
- the motor circuit board 12 exemplarily includes a mounting portion 121 and a pin end portion 122.
- the pin end portion 122 of the motor circuit board 12 can be bent relative to the mounting portion 121.
- the mounting portion 121 of the motor circuit board 12 can be substantially L-shaped.
- the mounting portion 121 and the pin end portion 122 can be substantially perpendicular.
- the motor circuit board 12 can be fixedly connected to the base 11.
- the mounting portion 121 of the motor circuit board 12 can be fixedly connected to the bottom 111 of the base 11.
- the pin end 122 of the motor circuit board 12 can be fixed to the side of the bottom 111 of the base 11.
- the first connecting member 131 can be movably connected to the base 11.
- the plurality of first connecting members 131 can be installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of first grooves 113 of the base 11.
- the first grooves 113 can limit the first connecting members 131.
- Part of the outer surface of the first connecting member 131 can be raised relative to the bottom 111 of the base 11.
- the first connecting member 131 may contact a metal member in the base 11 to reduce a friction coefficient of the movement of the first connecting member 131 .
- first connecting member 131 can adopt a ball structure. In other embodiments, the first connecting member 131 can also adopt a sliding shaft structure or other structures. The present application does not limit the specific structure of the first connecting member 131.
- FIG9 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 can be fixedly connected to the base 11.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 can be fixedly connected to the first side 1114 of the bottom 111 through the motor circuit board 12 (see Figure 7).
- the first anti-shake coil 141 can be electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12.
- the electrical connection method of the first anti-shake coil 141 is not specifically limited.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 can be directly electrically connected to the conductive part in the base 11 (not shown in the drawings). It can be understood that the conductive part can be formed in the base 11 by methods such as insert-molding.
- the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 may further include a first anti-shake sensor 145.
- the first anti-shake sensor 145 may be fixedly and electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12.
- the first anti-shake sensor 145 may be located inside the first anti-shake coil 141.
- the electrical connection method of the first anti-shake sensor 145 is not specifically limited.
- the second anti-shake coil 143 can be fixedly connected to the base 11.
- the second anti-shake coil 143 can be fixedly connected to the second edge 1115 of the bottom 111 via the motor circuit board 12 (see Figure 7).
- the second anti-shake coil 143 can be electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12.
- the electrical connection method of the second anti-shake coil 143 is not specifically limited.
- the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 may further include a second anti-shake sensor 146.
- the second anti-shake sensor 146 may be fixedly and electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12.
- the second anti-shake sensor 146 may be located inside the second anti-shake coil 143.
- the electrical connection method of the second anti-shake sensor 146 is not specifically limited.
- Figure 10 is an enlarged structural diagram of one embodiment of the guide bracket 15 shown in Figure 5.
- Figure 11 is a structural diagram of the guide bracket 15 shown in Figure 10 at another angle.
- the guide bracket 15 may be substantially in an “L” shape.
- the guide bracket 15 may include a plurality of guide blocks 151 and a plurality of connecting sections 152.
- the number of the guide blocks 151 may be three.
- the connecting section 152 is located between the two guide blocks 151, and the two connecting sections 152 may be arranged at an angle.
- the guide block 151 may have a first surface 1511 and a second surface 1512.
- the first surface 1511 and the second surface 1512 may be arranged to face each other.
- the guide block 151 may include a plurality of second grooves 1513 and a plurality of third grooves 1514.
- the number of the second grooves 1513 and the number of the third grooves 1514 may both be three.
- the second groove 1513 and the third groove 1514 may be arranged in opposite directions.
- the second groove 1513 may pass through the first surface 1511 of the guide bracket 15
- the third groove 1514 may pass through the second surface 1512 of the guide bracket 15 .
- the cross section of at least one second groove 1513 may be substantially V-shaped, or the cross section of at least one second groove 1513 may be substantially U-shaped.
- the extension direction of the second groove 1513 may be parallel to the second direction Y.
- the cross section of the third groove 1514 may be substantially U-shaped.
- Figure 12 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in Figure 5 in one embodiment.
- Figure 13 is a partial cross-sectional view of the motor 1 shown in Figure 12 at line B-B in one embodiment.
- the guide bracket 15 can be movably connected to the base 11.
- the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three first grooves 113 of the base 11.
- the three second grooves 1513 of the guide bracket 15 are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three first grooves 113 of the base 11.
- the first connecting members 131 installed in the first grooves 113 can be partially embedded in the second grooves 1513.
- the guide bracket 15 is movably connected to the base 11 via the multiple first connecting members 131.
- the first groove 113 can limit and guide the first connecting member 131, and the first connecting member 131 can move in the second direction Y within the second groove 1513. Therefore, the guide bracket 15 can also slide relative to the base 11 in a direction parallel to the second direction Y. In other embodiments, by changing the shape and size of the first groove 113 and the second groove 1513, the first connecting member 131 can move in the second direction Y within the first groove 113, and the second groove 1513 can limit and guide the first connecting member 131.
- the three third grooves 1514 of the guide bracket 15 can be arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16, and the second connecting members 132 installed in the third grooves 1514 can be partially embedded in the fourth grooves 164.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the guide bracket 15 via the multiple second connecting members 132.
- the third groove 1514 can limit and guide the second connecting member 132, and the second connecting member 132 can move within the fourth groove 164 along the first direction X. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket 16 can slide relative to the base 11 in a direction parallel to the first direction X.
- the second connecting member 132 can move within the third groove 1514 along the first direction X, and the fourth groove 164 can limit and guide the second connecting member 132.
- the second connecting member 132 can adopt a ball structure. In other embodiments, the second connecting member 132 can also adopt a sliding shaft structure or other structures. The present application does not limit the specific structure of the second connecting member 132.
- Fig. 14 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Fig. 5 in one embodiment.
- Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Fig. 14 at another angle.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a bottom plate 161, a side plate 162, a first bump 163a, and a second bump 163b.
- the side plate 162, the first bump 163a, and the second bump 163b are all connected to the bottom plate 161.
- the side plate 162, the first bump 163a, and the second bump 163b are spaced apart from each other.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 may further include a mounting hole 16a.
- the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16 may extend through the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z.
- the mounting hole 16a may be generally circular.
- the side plate 162, the first protrusion 163a, and the second protrusion 163b may be disposed around the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- a fixing block 161a is protruded from the wall of the mounting hole 16a.
- the fixing block 161a can be ring-shaped.
- the fixing block 161a and the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 can be stepped.
- the mounting hole 16 a forms a first opening 162 a on the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 .
- the anti-shake bracket 16 may further include a fourth groove 164.
- the number of the fourth grooves 164 may match the number of the second connecting members 132, and the number of the fourth grooves 164 may be three.
- the extension direction of the fourth groove 164 may be parallel to the first direction X.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a first mounting groove 165.
- the first mounting grooves 165 may be located on the side plate 162.
- the two first mounting grooves 165 may be spaced apart.
- FIG16 is a fourth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
- the third connecting member 133 can be installed in the first mounting slot 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the third connecting member 133 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means.
- the third connecting member 133 can be slidably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16.
- FIG17 is a fifth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
- the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be installed on the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means.
- the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be a magnet or a component with magnetism.
- the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 includes at least two opposite polarity directions.
- the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can include three magnets arranged along the first direction X. It can be understood that the polarity direction can be the direction of the North Pole (N) toward the South Pole (S), or the direction of the South Pole (S) toward the North Pole (N).
- the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be mounted on the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means.
- the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be a magnet or a magnetic component.
- the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 includes at least two opposite polarity directions.
- the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can include three magnets arranged along the second direction Y.
- Figure 18 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 4 in one embodiment.
- Figure 19 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 18 at line C-C in one embodiment.
- Figure 20 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 18 at line D-D in one embodiment.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the base 11 via the guide bracket 15.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can be located on the side of the guide bracket 15 away from the base 11. Specifically, the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 are located between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11.
- the third grooves 1514 of the guide bracket 15 are corresponding to the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the second connectors 132 installed in the third grooves 1514 can be at least partially embedded in the fourth grooves 164. In this case, the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 via the multiple second connectors 132.
- the guide bracket 15 can ensure the connection reliability between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11, and can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guidance, ensuring the stability of the relative position of the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142 and the relative position of the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144.
- the motor 1 can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base 11, the first connecting part 131, the guide bracket 15, the second connecting part 132 and the anti-shake bracket 16, thereby solving the problem of excessive lens tilt when the traditional motor performs optical image stabilization, and making the optical image stabilization movement of the camera module 100 smooth and reliable.
- first connecting members 131 are located in the first groove 113
- second connecting members 132 are located in the fourth groove 164 whose extension direction is parallel to the first direction X.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can move relative to the base 11 in a direction perpendicular to the third direction Z (i.e., the X-Y plane). In this way, the relative movement direction of the anti-shake bracket 16 and the guide bracket 15 is different from the relative movement direction of the guide bracket 15 and the base.
- the first lens 2 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16 .
- the first lens 2 can be positioned within the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the first lens 2 can be fixed to the fixing block 161a, and the first lens 2 does not extend beyond the first opening 162a.
- a portion of the first lens 2 can be positioned on a side of the fixing block 161a facing the base 11 and fixedly connected to the surface of the fixing block 161a facing the base 11.
- the connection position of the first lens 2 and the anti-shake bracket 16 is not specifically limited.
- the first lens 2 is fixedly connected to the fixing block 161 a to achieve a fixed connection with the anti-shake bracket 16 , and the connection with the anti-shake bracket 16 is more reliable.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 are arranged in the third direction Z, with the first anti-shake coil 141 facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 142, to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 in the first direction X.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 means that the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 141 faces the first anti-shake magnetic component 142.
- the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 141 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
- the first anti-shake sensor 145 may be used to detect a position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the first direction X.
- the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic element 144 are arranged in the third direction Z, with the second anti-shake coil 143 facing the second anti-shake magnetic element 144, to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 in the second direction Y.
- the second anti-shake coil 143 facing the second anti-shake magnetic element 144 means that the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 143 faces the second anti-shake magnetic element 144.
- the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 143 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
- the second anti-shake sensor 146 may be used to detect a position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the second direction Y.
- first anti-shake sensor 145 and the second anti-shake sensor 146 can detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 16, and the camera module 100 can adjust the position of the anti-shake bracket 16 according to the detection results, so as to achieve a better optical anti-shake effect.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, thereby Realize the movement of the first lens 2 in the XY plane.
- the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move can be perpendicular to the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move.
- the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move can intersect with the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move, but are not perpendicular to each other.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move perpendicular to the third direction Z (i.e., the X-Y plane) relative to the base 11. Furthermore, based on the two sets of drive mechanisms of the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic element 142, the second anti-shake coil 143, and the second anti-shake magnetic element 144, the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 can achieve a large range of motion in the X-Y plane.
- FIG21 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the focusing circuit board 23 shown in FIG5 at another angle.
- the focusing circuit board 23 may be substantially in the shape of a Chinese character " ⁇ " with a notch.
- a reinforcing plate is provided on at least a portion of the outer side of the focusing circuit board 23 .
- the focusing circuit board 23 includes a first fixing portion 231 and a second fixing portion 232.
- the first fixing portion 231 and the second fixing portion 232 may be located on both sides of the notch.
- FIG. 22 is a sixth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 5 in one embodiment.
- the focus circuit board 23 can be exemplarily fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16.
- a portion of the focus circuit board 23 is fixed to the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- a portion of the focus circuit board 23 is also fixed to the first and second bumps 163a, 163b of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- Part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the first bump 163a and the side plate 162
- part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the first and second bumps 163a, 163b
- part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the second bump 163b and the side plate 162.
- the focus coil 221 can be fixedly connected to the focus circuit board 23 and electrically connected to the focus circuit board 23.
- the focus coil 221 can be fixedly connected to a side of the first fixing portion 231 of the focus circuit board 23 away from the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the focus drive mechanism 22 further includes a focus sensor 24.
- the focus sensor 24 can be fixedly connected to the focus circuit board 23 and electrically connected to the focus circuit board 23.
- the focus sensor 24 can be fixedly connected to a side of the first fixing portion 231 away from the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and located inside the focus coil 221.
- the focus bracket 21 may be substantially frame-shaped, and the focus bracket 21 has an installation space 21 a .
- the focus bracket 21 includes a plurality of second mounting grooves 211 .
- the two second mounting grooves 211 may be disposed facing away from the mounting space 21a and spaced apart.
- the focus magnetic member 222 may be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21.
- the focus magnetic member 222 may be fixed to the focus bracket 21 by bonding or the like.
- the focusing magnetic member 222 may be a magnet or a component having magnetism.
- the focusing magnetic member 222 includes two magnets arranged along the third direction Z.
- Fig. 24 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 4 in one embodiment.
- Fig. 25 is a partial cross-sectional view of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 24 at line E-E in one embodiment.
- the focus bracket 21 can be slidably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the two first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 correspond to the two second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21 (see Figure 23).
- the two third connecting members 133 are mounted in the first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and at least partially embedded in the second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21.
- the relative sliding direction between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 can be parallel to the third direction Z.
- the third connecting members 133 can be fixedly connected to the second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21 and at least partially embedded in the first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- a buffer member (not shown in the drawings) is provided between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 to reduce collision between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 , thereby avoiding damage to the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 .
- the focusing coil 221 may be arranged corresponding to the focusing magnetic member 222 .
- the second lens 3 may be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21.
- the installation space 21a of the focus bracket 21 may be used to install the second lens 3.
- At least a portion of the second lens 3 may be located outside the focus bracket 21.
- the mounting space 21a of the focus bracket 21 may be arranged opposite to the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the optical axis of the first lens 2 may be substantially parallel to the optical axis of the second lens 3.
- the focus coil 221 is fixed to the focus circuit board 23, the focus magnetic part 222 is fixed to the focus bracket 21, and the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, and is used to drive the focus bracket 21 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z.
- the focus bracket 21 moves relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z
- the focus bracket 21 can drive the second lens 3 mounted thereon to move along the third direction Z.
- the motor 1 can realize automatic focus of the camera module 100.
- the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, which means that the winding plane of the focus coil 221 faces the focus magnetic part 222.
- the focus sensor 24 can be used to detect the position change of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z.
- the camera module 100 can adjust the position of the focus bracket 21 according to the detection result of the focus sensor 24, thereby achieving a better focusing effect.
- the focus drive mechanism 22 drives the focus bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, thereby driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, thereby achieving automatic focus of the camera module 100.
- the focus bracket 21 drives the focus bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, thereby driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, thereby achieving automatic focus of the camera module 100.
- the second lens 3 performs automatic focus
- the relative distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 in the third direction Z will change, and a smaller distance change can achieve a larger focal length change, which is beneficial to improving the focusing ability of the camera module 100.
- the second lens 3 with a shorter focusing stroke can achieve automatic focus of the motor 1 in the macro state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the macro state.
- Figure 26 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 24 at the F-F line.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142 are correspondingly arranged, and the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144 are correspondingly arranged.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142, the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144 jointly drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move along the X-Y plane, thereby driving the first lens 2 to move along the X-Y plane, and then realizing optical image stabilization of the camera module 100.
- the integrated motor 1 formed by the anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c is smaller in size, facilitating a miniaturized design of the camera module 100, thereby conserving internal space within the electronic device 1000. Furthermore, the integrated motor 1 eliminates one motor compared to a separate motor, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the camera module 100.
- the solution of achieving optical image stabilization and autofocus by having the anti-shake module 1b drive the first lens 2 and the focus module 1c drive the second lens 3 can, when the camera module 100 is focusing, only drive the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, while the first lens 2 does not need to move along the third direction Z.
- the focus stroke of the camera module 100 is the distance that the second lens 3 moves along its optical axis. Compared with camera modules 100 with the same imaging quality, the focus stroke of the camera module 100 of this embodiment is shorter.
- grouping the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 of the camera module 100 can avoid the anti-shake image rotation problem of the camera module 100, and the user's focusing experience is better.
- the optical axis directions of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be roughly parallel to the thickness direction of the electronic device 1000.
- the diameters of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 are not limited by the thickness of the electronic device 1000. There is no need to cut the lens into a specific diameter range in the thickness direction of the electronic device 1000.
- the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 are symmetrical in the second direction Y and the third direction Z.
- the camera module 100 does not have the problems of imaging ST separation and poor resolution.
- FIG27 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module 100 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
- the pressing member 17 can be fixed to the side of the anti-shake bracket 16 that faces away from the base 11. It will be appreciated that the pressing member 17 can cooperate with the anti-shake bracket 16 to limit the movement of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z, thereby preventing the focus bracket 21 from separating from the anti-shake bracket 16 during the focusing process.
- FIG28 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the housing 18 shown in FIG5 at another angle.
- the housing 18 may be exemplarily in the shape of a substantially square cover.
- the housing 18 is provided with a through hole 181 , through which a portion of the structure of the motor 1 can be exposed.
- the housing 18 is provided with a buffer member 182 , which is located inside the housing 18 and on one side of the through hole 181 .
- Figure 29 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the G-G line.
- the housing 18 can be adapted to the shape of the base 11 and can be mounted on the base 11.
- the housing 18 can be fixedly connected to the base 11 by gluing or other methods.
- the housing 18 can be assembled with the base 11 to jointly encapsulate and protect the internal structure of the motor 1.
- the focus bracket 21 and a portion of the structure of the second lens 3 may be exposed through the through hole 181 of the housing 18 .
- the buffer member 182 can be spaced apart from the pressing member 17 . It can be understood that the buffer member 182 can prevent the collision between the pressing member 17 and the housing 18 .
- FIG30 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
- the prism assembly 4 includes a prism 41 , a prism bracket 42 and a light shielding sheet 43 .
- the cross section of the prism 41 may be approximately boat-shaped.
- the cross section of the prism 41 may be triangular, parallelogram, or irregular, etc. This application does not limit this in detail.
- the prism 41 may include a first surface 411, a second surface 412, a first side surface 413, and a second side surface 414.
- the first surface 411 and the second surface 412 may be substantially parallel.
- the first side surface 413 and the second side surface 414 may be arranged at an angle.
- the first surface 411, the first side surface 413, the second surface 412, and the second side surface 414 may be connected end to end in sequence. In this case, the first side surface 413 and the second side surface 414 may be located on either side of the first surface 411.
- FIG31 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG30 in one embodiment.
- the light shielding sheet 43 may be fixed to the first surface 411 of the prism 41.
- the light shielding sheet 43 may be made of a material having light shielding properties, such as plastic, metal, or a composite material.
- the light shielding sheet 43 separates the first surface 411, thereby forming an incident surface S7 and an exit surface S11 that are spaced apart.
- the light shielding sheet 43 can be located between the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 to prevent light from prematurely exiting the prism 41 from the portion between the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11.
- the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 in this embodiment are both located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, that is, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 are located on the same side of the prism assembly 4.
- the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, and the other may be located on any one of the second surface 412, the first side surface 413, and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41.
- FIG32 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket 42 shown in FIG30 at another angle.
- the prism bracket 42 includes a first mounting portion 421 and a second mounting portion 422.
- the second mounting portion 422 is protruding from one end of the first mounting portion 421. It will be understood that although the prism bracket 42 is described as two parts in this embodiment, this does not affect the prism bracket 42 being a one-piece structure, that is, the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 can be formed in one piece. In other embodiments, the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 can be fixedly connected to the first mounting portion 421 by gluing, welding, or the like.
- the space enclosed by the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 may constitute an accommodating space 423 of the prism holder 42 .
- the accommodating space 423 is in communication with the outside of the prism holder 42 .
- the accommodating space 423 of the prism bracket 42 may include a first supporting surface 4231 and a second supporting surface 4232.
- the first supporting surface 4231 and the second supporting surface 4232 may be arranged at an angle therebetween.
- Figure 33 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram 1 of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the H-H line.
- the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42.
- the prism 41 is located in the accommodation space 423 of the prism bracket 42.
- the first surface 411 of the prism 41 can be substantially flush with the top of the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42.
- first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423, and the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423.
- the second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423, and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423.
- the prism assembly 4 can be fixedly connected to the motor 1.
- a portion of the prism assembly 4 can extend from the light-through hole 1116 of the bottom 111 of the base 11 and the avoidance hole 1121 of the side 112 into the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1.
- a portion of the base 11 of the motor 1 may be fixedly connected to the light shielding sheet 43 of the prism assembly 4.
- the prism bracket 42 of the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to a side of the base 11 away from the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 may be disposed facing the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 .
- the emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is located outside the motor 1 , and is located on the side of the prism 41 facing the motor 1 .
- FIG34 is a schematic exploded view of the image sensor assembly 5 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
- the image sensor assembly 5 includes an image sensor 51 , a filter 52 , a filter holder 53 and a circuit board 54 .
- the circuit board 54 includes a first board portion 541, a second board portion 542, and a third board portion 543.
- the second board portion 542 connects the first board portion 541 and the third board portion 543.
- the first board portion 541 and the third board portion 543 are opposite to each other and spaced apart.
- FIG35 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly 5 shown in FIG4 at line I-I.
- the image sensor 51 can be fixed to a side of the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54 that faces the third plate portion 543, and can be electrically connected to the circuit board 54. In this case, signals can be transmitted between the image sensor 51 and the circuit board 54. In other embodiments, the position where the image sensor 51 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
- the filter holder 53 can be fixed to the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54.
- the filter holder 53 and the image sensor 51 can be located on the same side of the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54.
- the filter holder 53 is provided with a through hole 531.
- the position where the filter holder 53 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
- the filter 52 is fixedly connected to the filter holder 53.
- the filter 52 can be located within the through-hole 531.
- the filter 52 is also disposed opposite the image sensor 51.
- the filter 52 can be used to filter infrared light or blue light from light before entering the image sensor 51, thereby ensuring that the image sensor 51 has better imaging quality.
- Figure 36 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the H-H line.
- the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the third plate portion 543 of the circuit board 54 , and a portion of the prism assembly 4 is located between the first plate portion 541 and the third plate portion 543 .
- the first mounting portion 421 of the prism bracket 42 may be fixed to the third plate portion 543.
- the emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is disposed opposite to the filter 52.
- the position where the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
- the image sensor 51 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal, thereby achieving imaging.
- the light after entering the prism 41, the light can be refracted at least three times inside the prism 41. In this way, the optical path of the camera module 100 is relatively long, enabling shooting in a telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the telephoto state.
- the light can be refracted twice inside the prism 41.
- the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 can be part of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41, and the image sensor 51 of the image sensor assembly 5 can be arranged facing the second side surface 414.
- optical image stabilization is achieved by driving the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move in the X-Y plane through the anti-shake module 1b
- automatic focus is achieved by driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z through the focusing module 1c
- the anti-shake module 1b and the focusing module 1c are an integrated structure
- the motor 1 has a simpler structure, a smaller size, and a lower manufacturing cost.
- the focus module 1c can drive the second lens 3 to move toward the image side of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z, thereby changing the focal length of the camera module 100 and enabling the camera module 100 to focus and shoot in the telephoto state.
- the motor 1 to be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4, with the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 facing the first lens 2 and the second lens 3
- the image sensor assembly 5 to be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4, with the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 facing the image sensor 51
- the reflected light path of the light in the prism 41 is longer, thereby satisfying the telephoto characteristics of the camera module 100 and improving the telephoto shooting performance of the camera module 100.
- the focusing module 1c can drive the second lens 3 to move toward the object side of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z, thereby changing the focal length of the camera module 100, thereby enabling the camera module 100 to focus and shoot in the macro state.
- the first lens 2 remains stationary in the third direction Z, while the second lens 3 moves along the third direction Z to achieve focusing.
- the structural arrangement of the camera module 100 is relatively reasonable, such that the movement distance of the second lens 3 along the third direction Z is the focusing stroke of the camera module 100. Since the movement distance of the second lens 3 is relatively short, the focusing stroke of the camera module 100 is also relatively short, and the space requirement of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z is also relatively small, thereby enabling a miniaturized arrangement of the camera module 100 and a thinner arrangement of the electronic device 1000.
- the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 may have opposite optical powers.
- the first lens 2 may have positive optical power
- the second lens 3 may have negative optical power
- the first lens 2 may have negative optical power
- the second lens 3 may have positive optical power.
- the optical powers of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 and setting the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to have opposite optical powers it is beneficial to achieve focusing and macro focusing, reduce the focusing stroke, improve the focusing ability, and help improve the overall image quality of the camera module 100 when imaging in close-up, increase the amount of light entering the system, promote macro imaging, and balance the difference in imaging quality between long-range shooting and close-up shooting, so that objects at different distances have good image quality and high imaging clarity.
- the second lens 3 can be used to converge the light beam, so that the diameter of the light beam entering the first lens 2 is smaller, and the aperture of the first lens 2 is no longer the maximum limit of the light aperture, which is conducive to the miniaturization and large aperture design of the camera module 100, effectively increasing the light aperture, achieving a smaller aperture number, and enhancing the focusing ability. It is conducive to macro shooting.
- the first lens 2 may include at least one lens
- the second lens 3 may include at least one lens
- the first lens 2 may include at least one lens with negative optical focal length.
- the second lens 3 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2, and the first lens 2 includes a third lens L3.
- the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 may be arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side.
- the first lens L1 may have positive optical focal length
- the second lens L2 may have negative optical focal length
- the third lens L3 may have negative optical focal length.
- the optical focal lengths of the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 is conducive to achieving the miniaturization, large aperture, and telephoto features of the camera module 100, and is conducive to the realization of the focusing process of the camera module 100 from the distant view to the near view and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- the second lens 3 may include at least one lens having an Abbe number less than 40.
- the Abbe number of the lens of the second lens 3 may be 5, 10, 22, 38, or 39. It is understood that the second lens 3 may include at least one lens with high dispersion. By limiting the Abbe number of at least one lens in the second lens 3 to less than 40, chromatic aberration in the camera module 100 is reduced, thereby ensuring that the camera module 100 has good imaging quality.
- the second lens 3 may include a lens with positive optical power, and the lens with the smallest focal length may be made of glass.
- the size of the camera module 100 can be reduced, miniaturizing the camera module 100, reducing the temperature drift coefficient, minimizing the temperature drift effect, and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- the Abbe number of the lens in the first lens 2 is different from the Abbe number of the prism 41 of the prism assembly 4, which is beneficial for correcting chromatic aberration at object distances from infinity to macro, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 can satisfy: f1/EFL>-1, wherein f1 is the focal length of the first lens 2, and EFL is the effective focal length of the camera module 100.
- f1/EFL can be equal to -0.999, -0.88, -0.7, 0.56, -0.3 or -0.1, etc.
- the value of f1/EFL can also satisfy other ranges. It is understandable that by reasonably limiting the range of f1/EFL, it is beneficial to reduce the aperture number, realize the design of a large aperture, improve the light-clearance diameter of the camera module 100, and ensure the good imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 can satisfy: f2/EFL ⁇ 0.9, where f2 is the focal length of the second lens 3.
- f2/EFL can be equal to 0.001, 0.11, 0.23, 0.38, 0.45, 0.5, 0.66, 0.75, 0.88 or 0.9, etc.
- the value of f2/EFL can also satisfy other ranges. It is understandable that by limiting the range of f2/EFL, the camera module 100 can balance the image quality difference between the long-range shooting and the close-up shooting of the camera module 100 under a smaller assembly sensitivity, thereby obtaining a more uniform image quality.
- the optical focal length of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be reasonably configured, which is beneficial to shortening the focusing stroke of the camera module 100, improving the focusing ability of the camera module 100, and realizing the shooting of the camera module 100 in a macro state, and having good image quality and high imaging clarity when shooting objects at different distances.
- the second lens 3 includes at least one lens with positive optical power, and the ratio of the focal length of the at least one lens with positive optical power in the second lens 3 to the effective focal length EFL of the camera module 100 is less than 1. It can be understood that by setting the ratio of the focal length of the at least one lens with positive optical power in the second lens 3 to the effective focal length EFL of the camera module 100 to be less than 1, it can be ensured that the second lens 3 is provided with a smaller number of lenses and can also provide sufficient optical power for the camera module 100, which can reduce the size of the second lens 3, which is conducive to macro shooting and is also conducive to the telephoto and miniaturized design of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 can satisfy the following requirement: FOV ⁇ 50°, where FOV is the field of view of the camera module 100.
- FOV is the field of view of the camera module 100.
- the FOV value can be 49.9, 30, 23, 18, 10, 8, 5.3, 3.8, or 0.6. It is understood that by setting the field of view of the camera module 100, the camera module 100 has a telephoto characteristic.
- the camera module 100 can satisfy the following requirement: IH > 2 mm, where IH is the maximum image height of the camera module 100.
- IH is the maximum image height of the camera module 100.
- the value of IH can be 2.01, 2.38, 3.54, 4.36, 6.66, or 8.88. It is understood that by reasonably limiting the range of IH, the camera module 100 can have a large target surface, which is conducive to achieving a higher imaging magnification and improving the resolution of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 may satisfy the following condition: L/IH>2, where L is the total optical path length of the light after multiple folds within the prism 41 of the prism assembly 4.
- L is the total optical path length of the light after multiple folds within the prism 41 of the prism assembly 4.
- the value of L/IH may be 2.1, 3.8, 4.5, 5.87, 6.66, or 8.88. It is understood that the total optical path length L of the light within the prism 41 is greater than twice the image height IH, which facilitates multiple folding of the light and increases the optical path length, thereby facilitating the realization of the telephoto characteristics and miniaturization of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 may satisfy: Fno ⁇ 3.6, where Fno is the aperture number of the camera module 100.
- Fno is the aperture number of the camera module 100.
- the value of Fno may be equal to 0.5, 0.99, 1.53, 1.66, 2.38, 2.66, 3.02, or 3.59, etc. It is understandable that the smaller the value of Fno of the camera module 100, the larger the aperture of the camera module 100; and the larger the value of Fno of the camera module 100, the smaller the aperture of the camera module 100.
- the camera module 100 has the characteristic of a large aperture.
- Figure 37 is a first embodiment of the present application of the camera module 100 provided at an infinite object distance.
- FIG38 is a structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG37 in a close-up working state during macro shooting.
- the second lens system 3 may include a first lens L1 and a second lens L2, arranged sequentially from the object side to the image side.
- the first lens L1 may have positive refractive power and may include an object-side surface S1 and an image-side surface S2.
- the second lens L2 may have negative refractive power and may include an object-side surface S3 and an image-side surface S4.
- the first lens element 2 may have negative optical power
- the second lens element may include a third lens element L3
- the third lens element L3 may have negative optical power
- the third lens element L3 may include an object-side surface S5 and an image-side surface S6.
- the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 can be made of plastic.
- the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 can all be made of glass, or a combination of glass and plastic, which is not limited in this application.
- the prism 41 may include an incident surface S7, a first reflective surface S8, a second reflective surface S9, a third reflective surface S10, and an exit surface S11.
- the first reflective surface S8 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41
- the second reflective surface S9 may be a portion of the first surface 411 of the prism 41
- the third reflective surface S10 may be a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41.
- the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may all be located on the same surface, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may at least partially overlap.
- light can be transmitted into the prism 41 from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9, and light can also be reflected from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9.
- the incident surface S7, the second reflection surface S9 and the exit surface S11 may not be coplanar, and two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflection surface S9 and the exit surface S11 may not overlap, which is not specifically limited in this application.
- light emitted from the second lens 3 may be reflected and folded three times within the prism 41 before reaching the image sensor 51.
- the light from the second lens 3 may pass through the incident surface S7 and enter the prism 41.
- At least a portion of the light that passed through the incident surface S7 is reflected at the first reflection surface S8, undergoing a first reflection.
- At least a portion of the light reflected from the first reflection surface S8 is reflected at the second reflection surface S9, undergoing a second reflection.
- the third reflection surface S10 undergoing a third reflection. This allows at least a portion of the light to pass through the exit surface S11 and exit the prism 41 to the image sensor 51.
- the cross-section of the prism 41 can be roughly an isosceles trapezoid.
- the first reflecting surface S8 and the third reflecting surface S10 can be the two waists of the isosceles trapezoid.
- the angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 can be 33°, and the angle between the third reflecting surface S10 and the exit surface S11 can be 33°.
- the prism 41 can be a triangular prism, a quadrilateral prism or other element capable of folding the light path, and the angle between the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 and the first reflecting surface S8 or the angle between the third reflecting surface S10 and the exit surface S11 can also be 30° or 45°, etc., which are not limited in this application.
- the filter 52 may include an object-side surface S12 and an image-side surface S13.
- An imaging surface S14 is located on the image side of the first lens 2. This imaging surface S14 may be the surface on which an image is formed after light sequentially passes through the second lens 3 and each lens in the first lens 2.
- the image sensor 51 is located on the imaging surface S14.
- the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be located on the same side of the prism 41.
- the second lens 3 can move along the optical axis toward the image side, while the first lens 2 remains stationary, so as to increase the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 and achieve focusing.
- Table 1a which shows the radius of curvature, thickness, refractive index, and Abbe number of each lens and filter 52 in the camera module 100 of the first embodiment when operating at infinity.
- the Abbe number is also known as the dispersion coefficient.
- OBJ represents the object-side surface of the camera module 100.
- Table 1b shows the aspheric coefficients of each lens of the camera module 100 of the first embodiment.
- symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 , and A 16 represent aspheric coefficients. It should be noted that the parameters in the table are expressed in scientific notation. For example, 1.365E-06 means 1.365 ⁇ 10 -6 . It should be noted that when symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 , and A 16 appear again in this application, unless otherwise explained, they have the same meaning as here and will not be repeated here.
- the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of the first lens L1 to the third lens L3 are all aspherical surfaces, which can be defined by, but not limited to, the following aspherical surface formula:
- z(x,y) is the sag of the optical surface
- k is the cone coefficient
- c is the radius of curvature
- r is the radius height in the direction of the optical axis
- r 2 x 2 +y 2
- ⁇ i is the polynomial coefficient
- ri is the normalized radial coordinate
- a 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 are aspheric coefficients.
- f21 is the focal length of the first lens L1 in the second lens 3
- f22 is the focal length of the second lens L2 in the second lens 3.
- the camera module 100 switches from a telephoto to a close-up, for example, to a macro distance of 68mm, the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 increases, and the focus stroke of the second lens 3 is 1.43mm.
- This short focus stroke provides good focusing effect, enabling excellent macro photography.
- the EFL is 17.2mm
- the Fno is 2.6
- the FOV is 25°
- the camera module 100 has the characteristics of a telephoto lens and a large aperture.
- Figure 39 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the camera module 100 provided in the second embodiment of the present application in the long-range working state when the object distance is infinite.
- Figure 40 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 39 in the close-range working state during macro shooting.
- the second lens element 3 may have positive optical power.
- the second lens element 3 may include a first lens element L1 and a second lens element L2, arranged sequentially from the object side to the image side.
- the first lens element L1 may have positive optical power and may include an object-side surface S1 and an image-side surface S2.
- the second lens element L2 may have negative optical power and may include an object-side surface S3 and an image-side surface S4.
- the first lens element 2 may have negative optical power
- the second lens element may include a third lens element L3
- the third lens element L3 may have negative optical power
- the third lens element L3 may include an object-side surface S5 and an image-side surface S6.
- the prism 41 may include an incident surface S7, a first reflective surface S8, a second reflective surface S9, a third reflective surface S10, a fourth reflective surface S15, a fifth reflective surface S16, and an exit surface S11.
- the first reflective surface S8 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41
- the second reflective surface S9 and the fourth reflective surface S15 may be a portion of the first surface 411 of the prism 41
- the third reflective surface S10 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41.
- the fifth reflective surface S16 may be a portion of the second surface 412
- the fifth reflective surface S16 may be a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41.
- the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may all be located on one surface, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may at least partially overlap.
- the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9 may be coplanar, and the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9 may partially overlap, so that light can be transmitted into the prism 41 from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9, and light can also be reflected from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9.
- the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may not be coplanar, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may not overlap, and this application is not limited to this.
- light emitted through the second lens 3 may be reflected and folded five times within the prism 41 before reaching the image sensor 51.
- the light from the second lens 3 may pass through the exit surface S7 and enter the prism 41.
- At least a portion of the light that passed through the incident surface S7 is reflected at the first reflection surface S8, resulting in a first reflection.
- At least a portion of the light reflected from the first reflection surface S8 is reflected at the second reflection surface S9, resulting in a second reflection.
- At least a portion of the light reflected from the second reflection surface S9 is reflected at the third reflection surface S10, resulting in a third reflection.
- At least a portion of the light reflected from the third reflection surface S10 is reflected at the fourth reflection surface S15, resulting in a fourth reflection.
- at least a portion of the light reflected from the fourth reflection surface S15 is reflected at the fifth reflection surface S16, resulting in at least a portion of the light being emitted from the prism 41 through the exit surface S11 and reaching the image sensor 51.
- the cross-section of the prism 41 can be roughly an isosceles trapezoid.
- the first reflecting surface S8 and the fifth reflecting surface S16 can be the two waists of the isosceles trapezoid.
- the angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 can be 30°, and the angle between the fifth reflecting surface S16 and the exit surface S11 can be 30°.
- the angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 of the prism 41 or the angle between the fifth reflecting surface S16 and the exit surface S11 can be 36° or 45°, etc., which are not limited in this application.
- the filter 52 may include an object-side surface S12 and an image-side surface S13.
- An imaging surface S14 is located on the image side of the camera module 100. This surface is where light forms an image after passing through each lens in the second lens 3 and the first lens 2.
- the image sensor 51 is located on the imaging surface S14.
- the second lens 3 and the image sensor 51 are located on the same side of the prism 41.
- the second lens 3 can move along the optical axis toward the object side of the camera module 100, and the first lens 2 remains stationary to achieve focusing.
- Table 2a which shows the radius of curvature, thickness, refractive index, and Abbe number of each lens and filter 52 in the second embodiment of the camera module 100 when operating at infinity.
- the Abbe number is also known as the dispersion coefficient.
- OBJ represents the object-side surface of the camera module 100.
- Table 2b shows the aspheric coefficients of each lens of the camera module 100 of the second embodiment.
- symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 represent aspheric coefficients.
- the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of the first lens L1 to the third lens L3 are all aspherical surfaces, which can be defined by, but not limited to, the following aspherical surface formula:
- z(x,y) is the sag of the optical surface
- k is the cone coefficient
- c is the radius of curvature
- r is the radius height in the direction of the optical axis
- r 2 x 2 +y 2
- ⁇ i is the polynomial coefficient
- ri is the normalized radial coordinate
- a 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 are aspheric coefficients.
- Table 2c shows the basic parameters of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 39 at infinity.
- the camera module 100 switches from a telephoto lens to a close-up lens, for example, to a macro lens of 100mm, the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 increases, and the focus stroke of the second lens 3 is 1.63mm.
- This short focus stroke provides excellent focusing and enables excellent macro photography.
- the EFL is 26mm
- the Fno is 3.4
- the FOV is 17°, indicating that the camera module 100 has the characteristics of a telephoto lens and a large aperture.
- Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 3.
- Fig. 42 is a partial exploded view of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 41 in one embodiment.
- the motor 1 of the camera module 100 includes an anti-shake module 1b and a focus module 1c.
- the anti-shake module 1b of the motor 1 may include a base 11, a third connecting member 133, a rolling member 134, an anti-shake drive mechanism 14, and an anti-shake bracket 16.
- the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 includes a first anti-shake coil 141, a first anti-shake magnetic member 142, a second anti-shake coil 143, and a second anti-shake magnetic member 144.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 are arranged in correspondence to form a drive mechanism
- the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 are arranged in correspondence to form another drive mechanism.
- FIG43 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
- the base 11 includes a plurality of first rolling grooves 114.
- the three first rolling grooves 114 can be located at a first corner 1111, a second corner 1112, and a third corner 1113 of the base 11, respectively.
- the three first grooves 113 of the base 11 can extend parallel to the first direction X or the second direction Y.
- the first grooves 113 can extend along the X-Y plane.
- FIG44 is a partial structural assembly diagram 1 of the motor 1 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
- the rolling element 134 can be movably connected to the base 11.
- the plurality of rolling elements 134 can be located in the plurality of first rolling grooves 114 of the base 11 in a one-to-one correspondence.
- the rolling element 134 can be a ball structure, so that the rolling element 134 can move in any direction along the X-Y plane relative to the base 11 in the first rolling groove 114.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 , the second anti-shake coil 143 , the first anti-shake sensor 145 , and the second anti-shake sensor 146 may all be fixedly connected to the base 11 and electrically connected to the base 11 .
- Figure 45 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Figure 42 in one embodiment.
- Figure 46 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Figure 45 at another angle.
- the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 .
- the side plate 162 is disposed around the mounting hole 16 a of the anti-shake bracket 16 .
- the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a plurality of second rolling grooves 165 , and the number of the second rolling grooves 165 may be three.
- the cross-sections of the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16 may be substantially circular.
- Figure 47 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 41 in one embodiment.
- Figure 48 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line J-J in one embodiment.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the base 11.
- the three second rolling grooves 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 correspond one-to-one to the three first rolling grooves 114 of the base 11.
- the rolling elements 134 installed in the first rolling grooves 114 can at least partially fit into the second rolling grooves 165.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the base 11 via the multiple rolling elements 134.
- the rolling element 134 can roll within the first rolling groove 114 in the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, and the second rolling groove 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 can limit the rolling element 134. It is understood that the anti-shake bracket 16 and the rolling element 134 can move together in any direction in the X-Y plane relative to the base 11, making the relative movement between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11 more controllable. In other embodiments, by changing the shape and size of the first rolling groove 114 and the second rolling groove 165, the first rolling groove 114 can limit the rolling element 134, allowing the rolling element 134 to move within the first groove 113 in the first direction X and/or the second direction Y.
- Figure 49 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line K-K.
- Figure 50 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line L-L.
- the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 are correspondingly provided to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X.
- the first anti-shake sensor 145 can be used to detect position changes of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the first direction X.
- the second anti-shake coil 143 is correspondingly provided with the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y.
- the second anti-shake sensor 146 can be used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the second direction Y.
- the first lens 2 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane.
- the focus bracket 21 can be movably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the second lens 3 can be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the focus bracket 21 and the second lens 3 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane.
- the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane relative to the base 11, thereby offsetting the shaking stroke generated by the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 in the X-Y plane, realizing optical image stabilization of the camera module 100, and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
- the focus coil 221 is disposed facing the focus magnetic member 222 to drive the focus bracket 21 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z.
- the focus sensor 24 can be used to detect position changes of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z.
- the focusing coil 221 and the focusing magnetic member 222 can drive the focusing bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, thereby driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, thereby realizing automatic focusing of the camera module 100.
- the solution in which the anti-shake bracket 16 is movably connected to the base 11 through the rolling member 134 has a simpler structure, thereby realizing the miniaturization of the motor 1 and the camera module 100.
- FIG51 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
- the pressing member 17 can be fixedly connected to the side of the anti-shake bracket 16 facing away from the base 11.
- the pressing member 17 can be fixed to the side plate 162.
- the pressing member 17 can limit the movement of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z to prevent the focus bracket 21 from separating from the anti-shake bracket 16.
- housing 18 can be configured to match the shape of base 11 and can be positioned over base 11. Housing 18 can be fixedly connected to base 11 by gluing or other methods. Housing 18 can be assembled with base 11 to encapsulate and protect the internal structure of motor 1.
- the anti-shake module 1b includes the base 11, the third connecting member 133, the rolling member 134, the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 and the anti-shake bracket 16.
- the structure of the anti-shake module 1b is simpler, the volume of the motor 1 is smaller, and the miniaturization setting of the camera module 100 can be further realized.
- Fig. 52 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 3.
- Fig. 53 is a schematic diagram of a partial decomposition of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 52 in one embodiment.
- the camera module 100 includes a motor 1, a first lens 2, a second lens 3, a prism assembly 4, and an image sensor assembly 5. It is understood that the camera module 100 may also include fewer or more structures. For example, the camera module 100 may also include a variable aperture (not shown in the figures).
- FIG54 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG53 in one embodiment.
- the cross-section of the prism 41 may be substantially a parallelogram.
- first surface 411 of the prism 41 and the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel.
- the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel.
- the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 may be located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, with a portion of the first surface 411 forming the incident surface S7.
- the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the second surface 412 of the prism 41, with a portion of the second surface 412 forming the exit surface S11.
- the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 are located on different sides of the prism assembly 4.
- FIG55 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket 42 shown in FIG54 at another angle.
- the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 may be protruded from the first mounting portion 421 .
- the space enclosed by the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 may constitute the accommodating space 423 of the prism holder 42.
- the first supporting surface 4231 and the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space may be arranged at an angle.
- Figure 56 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram 1 of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
- the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42 . At this time, the prism 41 is located in the accommodating space 423 of the prism bracket 42 .
- the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423, and the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423.
- the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423, and the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423.
- the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to the motor 1.
- a portion of the prism assembly 4 may extend into the avoidance space of the motor 1.
- a portion of the base 11 of the motor 1 may be fixedly connected to the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 .
- the first mounting portion 421 of the prism bracket 42 of the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to a side of the base 11 away from the anti-shake bracket 16 .
- the emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is located outside the motor 1 , and is located on the side of the prism 41 facing away from the motor 1 .
- Figure 57 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly of Figure 53 at line N-N.
- the image sensor 51 may be fixed to a side of the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 that faces the first board portion 541 .
- the filter holder 53 may be fixed to the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 .
- the filter holder 53 and the image sensor 51 may be located on the same side of the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 .
- the optical filter 52 is fixedly connected to the optical filter holder 53.
- the optical filter 52 can be located within the through hole 531 of the optical filter holder 53.
- the optical filter 52 is also disposed opposite the image sensor 51.
- the optical filter 52 can be used to filter infrared light or blue light from light before entering the image sensor 51, thereby ensuring that the image sensor 51 has better imaging quality.
- Figure 58 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
- the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54 , and a portion thereof is located between the first plate portion 541 and the third plate portion 543 .
- the first mounting portion 421 of the prism holder 42 is fixed to the first plate portion 541.
- the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 is disposed opposite the optical filter 52.
- the image sensor assembly 5 can be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4.
- a portion of the filter holder 53 of the image sensor assembly 5 is fixedly connected to the prism holder 42 of the prism assembly 4.
- a portion of the circuit board 54 is fixedly connected to the prism holder 42 of the prism assembly 4, and a portion is fixedly connected to the base 11 of the motor 1.
- the filter 52 may be disposed opposite to and cover the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 , so that light can reach the image sensor 51 only after being filtered by the filter 52 .
- the image sensor 51 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal, thereby realizing imaging.
- the light after entering the prism 41, the light can be refracted at least four times inside the prism 41.
- the optical path of the camera module 100 is relatively large, which enables shooting in a telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the telephoto state.
- the scheme of setting a parallelogram prism 41 can make the light be refracted at least four times in the prism 41, can have a longer total optical path length, and can have higher imaging quality in the telephoto state.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Studio Devices (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求在2024年4月15日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202410453570.X的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“摄像模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 15, 2024, with application number 202410453570.X, and priority to the Chinese patent application with the invention name “Camera module and electronic equipment”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference into this application.
本申请涉及拍摄设备技术领域,特别涉及一种摄像模组及电子设备。The present application relates to the technical field of photographing equipment, and in particular to a camera module and electronic equipment.
随着手机等便携式电子设备的不断发展,用户对便携式电子设备的长焦微距拍照性能的要求越来越高。为了满足用户的需求,长焦微距摄像模组成为电子设备中必不可少的一部分。但是,由于现有的长焦微距摄像模组的结构设置不合理,导致马达驱动镜头进行对焦时的运动行程较大。With the continuous development of portable electronic devices such as mobile phones, users are demanding increasingly higher performance in telephoto and macro photography. To meet these demands, telephoto and macro camera modules have become an essential component of electronic devices. However, the structural design of existing telephoto and macro camera modules is irrational, resulting in a large range of movement when the motor drives the lens to focus.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请提供一种对焦时的运动行程较小的摄像模组和电子设备。The present application provides a camera module and electronic equipment with a smaller movement range during focusing.
第一方面,本申请提供一种摄像模组。摄像模组包括马达、第一镜头、第二镜头、棱镜组件以及图像传感器组件,第一镜头和第二镜头安装于马达;棱镜组件包括入射面和出射面,棱镜组件的入射面面向第一镜头设置,棱镜的出射面面向图像传感器组件设置;光线进入摄像模组后,依次经过第二镜头、第一镜头以及棱镜组件的入射面后进入棱镜组件,光线在棱镜组件的内部发生多次反射后,由棱镜组件的出射面射出,并成像于图像传感器组件;马达包括基座、防抖驱动机构、防抖支架、对焦支架以及对焦驱动机构,防抖支架活动连接于基座,对焦支架活动连接于防抖支架;第一镜头固定于防抖支架,第二镜头固定于对焦支架,防抖驱动机构用于驱动防抖支架带动第一镜头、对焦支架以及第二镜头相对基座沿第一方向和/或第二方向运动,对焦驱动机构用于驱动对焦支架带动第二镜头相对防抖支架沿第三方向运动,以使第二镜头靠近或远离第一镜头,其中,第一方向、第二方向以及第三方向彼此不同。In the first aspect, the present application provides a camera module. The camera module includes a motor, a first lens, a second lens, a prism assembly and an image sensor assembly. The first lens and the second lens are mounted on the motor; the prism assembly includes an incident surface and an exit surface. The incident surface of the prism assembly is arranged facing the first lens, and the exit surface of the prism is arranged facing the image sensor assembly; after the light enters the camera module, it passes through the second lens, the first lens and the incident surface of the prism assembly in sequence and then enters the prism assembly. After the light is reflected multiple times inside the prism assembly, it is emitted from the exit surface of the prism assembly and is imaged on the image sensor assembly; the motor includes a base, an anti-shake drive mechanism, and a plurality of lens elements. The invention relates to a lens assembly comprising a structure, an anti-shake bracket, a focus bracket and a focus driving mechanism, the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base, and the focus bracket is movably connected to the anti-shake bracket; the first lens is fixed to the anti-shake bracket, and the second lens is fixed to the focus bracket. The anti-shake driving mechanism is used to drive the anti-shake bracket to drive the first lens, the focus bracket and the second lens to move relative to the base along the first direction and/or the second direction, and the focus driving mechanism is used to drive the focus bracket to drive the second lens to move relative to the anti-shake bracket along the third direction, so that the second lens is close to or away from the first lens, wherein the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are different from each other.
可以理解的是,马达可以通过控制第一镜头和第二镜头沿第一方向和/或第二方向运动,以实现光学防抖。这样,当摄像模组采集环境光线时,若摄像模组因外力作用而在沿第一方向和/或第二方向产生抖动,则可以通过马达控制第一镜头和第二镜头沿第一方向和/或第二方向的运动,抵消第一镜头和第二镜头沿第一方向和/或第二方向产生的抖动行程,以避免或者减少第一镜头和第二镜头因抖动而导致的位置偏置。换言之,本申请的摄像模组可以通过马达控制第一镜头和第二镜头沿第一方向和/或第二方向上运动,实现摄像模组的光学图像防抖,提高摄像模组的成像质量。It is understandable that the motor can achieve optical image stabilization by controlling the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction. In this way, when the camera module collects ambient light, if the camera module shakes in the first direction and/or the second direction due to external force, the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction can be controlled by the motor to offset the shaking stroke of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction, so as to avoid or reduce the position offset of the first lens and the second lens caused by the shaking. In other words, the camera module of the present application can achieve optical image stabilization of the camera module by controlling the movement of the first lens and the second lens in the first direction and/or the second direction by the motor, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module.
可以理解的是,在摄像模组工作时,第一镜头在第三方向上保持不动,第二镜头沿第三方向运动实现自动对焦,摄像模组的结构设置较合理,这样,第二镜头的沿第三方向的运动距离即为摄像模组的对焦行程。由于第二镜头的运动距离较小,摄像模组的对焦行程也较小,摄像模组在第三方向上的空间需求也较小,能够实现摄像模组的小型化设置。It is understandable that when the camera module is operating, the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, while the second lens moves along the third direction to achieve autofocus. The camera module's structural configuration is relatively reasonable, so the movement distance of the second lens along the third direction is the camera module's focus stroke. Because the second lens's movement distance is relatively short, the camera module's focus stroke is also relatively short, and the camera module's space requirement in the third direction is also relatively small, enabling a compact camera module.
可以理解的是,将摄像模组的第一镜头和第二镜头分群设置,能够避免摄像模组的防抖像旋问题,用户的对焦体验较佳。It is understandable that grouping the first lens and the second lens of the camera module can avoid the anti-shake and image rotation problems of the camera module, and the user's focusing experience is better.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在摄像模组从远景到近景的对焦过程中,第一镜头在第三方向上保持不动,第二镜头沿第三方向远离第一镜头,第一镜头和第二镜头之间的间距增大;在摄像模组从近景到远景的对焦过程中,第一镜头在第三方向上保持不动,第二镜头沿第三方向靠近第一镜头,第一镜头和第二镜头之间的间距减小。In one possible implementation, during the focusing process of the camera module from a distant view to a close view, the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, the second lens moves away from the first lens along the third direction, and the distance between the first lens and the second lens increases; during the focusing process of the camera module from a close view to a distant view, the first lens remains stationary in the third direction, the second lens moves closer to the first lens along the third direction, and the distance between the first lens and the second lens decreases.
可以理解的是,当摄像模组切换至长焦状态下的拍摄时,第二镜头在第三方向上向摄像模组的像侧移动,改变摄像模组的焦距,能够实现摄像模组在长焦状态下的对焦以及拍摄。It can be understood that when the camera module switches to shooting in the telephoto state, the second lens moves toward the image side of the camera module in the third direction, changing the focal length of the camera module, thereby enabling the camera module to focus and shoot in the telephoto state.
可以理解的是,当摄像模组切换至微距状态下的拍摄时,第二镜头在第三方向上向摄像模组的物侧移动,改变摄像模组的焦距,就能够实现摄像模组在微距状态下的对焦以及拍摄。It can be understood that when the camera module switches to shooting in macro state, the second lens moves toward the object side of the camera module in the third direction, changing the focal length of the camera module, thereby enabling the camera module to focus and shoot in macro state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,防抖支架包括安装孔,对焦支架包括安装空间,安装孔和安装空间相对设置;第一镜头固定于防抖支架的安装孔内,第二镜头固定于对焦支架的安装空间内。In one possible implementation, the anti-shake bracket includes a mounting hole, the focus bracket includes a mounting space, and the mounting hole and the mounting space are arranged relative to each other; the first lens is fixed in the mounting hole of the anti-shake bracket, and the second lens is fixed in the mounting space of the focus bracket.
可以理解的是,通过设置安装孔和安装空间相对设置,有利于实现第一镜头的光轴与第二镜头的光轴大致平行。示例性地,第一镜头和第二镜头的光轴方向可以大致平行于第三方向,也即第一镜头和第二镜头的光轴方向可以均大致平行于电子设备的厚度方向,第一镜头和第二镜头的直径不受电子设备的厚度限制,不需要在电子设备的厚度方向上将透镜切割到特定的直径范围内,第一镜头和第二镜头在第二方向和 第三方向上均对称,摄像模组无成像ST分离及解析力差的问题。It is understandable that by setting the mounting hole and the mounting space relative to each other, it is helpful to achieve that the optical axis of the first lens is roughly parallel to the optical axis of the second lens. For example, the optical axis directions of the first lens and the second lens can be roughly parallel to the third direction, that is, the optical axis directions of the first lens and the second lens can be roughly parallel to the thickness direction of the electronic device. The diameters of the first lens and the second lens are not limited by the thickness of the electronic device, and there is no need to cut the lens into a specific diameter range in the thickness direction of the electronic device. The first lens and the second lens are roughly parallel to the third direction and the thickness direction of the electronic device. The camera module is symmetrical in the third direction and has no problems of imaging ST separation and poor resolution.
在一种可能的实现方式中,防抖支架的安装孔的孔壁凸设有固定块;第一镜头固定于固定块,且至少部分位于固定块的朝向基座的一侧。In a possible implementation, a fixing block is protruded from a wall of the mounting hole of the anti-shake bracket; the first lens is fixed to the fixing block and is at least partially located on a side of the fixing block facing the base.
可以理解的是,第一镜头通过与固定块固定连接,以实现与防抖支架的固定连接,且与防抖支架的连接更加可靠。It can be understood that the first lens is fixedly connected to the fixing block to achieve a fixed connection with the anti-shake bracket, and the connection with the anti-shake bracket is more reliable.
在一种可能的实现方式中,安装孔在防抖支架上形成第一开口,第一镜头未伸出第一开口。In a possible implementation, the mounting hole forms a first opening on the anti-shake bracket, and the first lens does not extend out of the first opening.
可以理解的是,在第二镜头进行对焦的过程中,由于第一镜头未伸出第一开口,第一镜头和第二镜头之间不会产生碰撞,从而避免第一镜头或者第二镜头的损坏。It is understandable that during the focusing process of the second lens, since the first lens does not extend out of the first opening, no collision occurs between the first lens and the second lens, thereby avoiding damage to the first lens or the second lens.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一镜头具有负光焦度,第二镜头具有正光焦度。In a possible implementation, the first lens has negative optical power, and the second lens has positive optical power.
可以理解的是,通过合理配置第一镜头和第二镜头的光焦度、设置第一镜头和第二镜头具有相反的光焦度,有利于实现对焦和微距对焦,减小对焦行程,提升对焦能力,且有利于提升摄像模组在近景成像时画面的整体像质,增大系统的进光量,促进微距成像,并且能够平衡远景拍摄和近景拍摄的成像质量的差异,拍摄不同距离的物体时均具有良好的画质,且成像清晰度高。It can be understood that by reasonably configuring the optical focal length of the first lens and the second lens and setting the first lens and the second lens to have opposite optical focal lengths, it is beneficial to achieve focusing and macro focusing, reduce the focusing stroke, improve the focusing ability, and help improve the overall image quality of the camera module when imaging in close-up, increase the amount of light entering the system, promote macro imaging, and balance the difference in imaging quality between long-range shooting and close-up shooting. When shooting objects at different distances, the image quality is good and the imaging clarity is high.
可以理解的是,当第一镜头具有负光焦度、第二镜头具有正光焦度时,第二镜头可以用于光束汇聚,使得进入第一镜头的光束的直径较小,第一镜头的口径不再成为通光孔径的最大限制,有利于摄像模组的小型化和大光圈设计,有效增加通光孔径,实现较小的光圈数,且能够增强对焦能力,有利于实现微距拍摄。It can be understood that when the first lens has negative optical power and the second lens has positive optical power, the second lens can be used for light beam convergence, so that the diameter of the light beam entering the first lens is smaller, and the aperture of the first lens is no longer the maximum limitation of the light aperture, which is conducive to the miniaturization and large aperture design of the camera module, effectively increasing the light aperture, achieving a smaller aperture number, and enhancing the focusing ability, which is conducive to macro shooting.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二镜头包括第一透镜和第二透镜,第一镜头包括第三透镜,第一透镜、第二透镜和第三透镜依次排列,第一透镜具有正光焦度,第二透镜具有负光焦度,第三透镜具有负光焦度。In one possible implementation, the second lens includes a first lens and a second lens, the first lens includes a third lens, the first lens, the second lens and the third lens are arranged in sequence, the first lens has positive optical power, the second lens has negative optical power, and the third lens has negative optical power.
可以理解的是,合理配置第一透镜、第二透镜和第三透镜的光焦度,有利于实现摄像模组的小型化、大光圈和长焦等特征,有利于摄像模组从远景到近景的对焦过程的实现以及提升摄像模组的成像质量。It can be understood that a reasonable configuration of the optical focal length of the first lens, the second lens and the third lens is conducive to achieving the miniaturization, large aperture and telephoto features of the camera module, and is conducive to the realization of the focusing process of the camera module from long sight to close sight and improving the imaging quality of the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,摄像模组的第一镜头的焦距f1和摄像模组的有效焦距EFL,满足:f1/EFL>-1。In a possible implementation, the focal length f1 of the first lens of the camera module and the effective focal length EFL of the camera module satisfy: f1/EFL>-1.
可以理解的是,通过合理限定f1/EFL的范围,有利于降低光圈数,实现大光圈的设计,提高摄像模组的通光口径,确保摄像模组的良好的成像质量。It is understandable that by reasonably limiting the range of f1/EFL, it is helpful to reduce the aperture number, realize the design of large aperture, increase the light transmission diameter of the camera module, and ensure the good imaging quality of the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,摄像模组的第二镜头的焦距f2和摄像模组的有效焦距EFL,满足:f2/EFL≤0.9。In one possible implementation, the focal length f2 of the second lens of the camera module and the effective focal length EFL of the camera module satisfy: f2/EFL≤0.9.
可以理解的是,通过限定f2/EFL的范围,使得摄像模组能够在较小的组装敏感度下,平衡摄像模组远景拍摄和近景拍摄的像质差异,获得更均匀的像质。It can be understood that by limiting the range of f2/EFL, the camera module can balance the image quality differences between the long-range and close-range shooting of the camera module at a smaller assembly sensitivity, thereby obtaining more uniform image quality.
可以理解的是,通过合理限定f1/EFL和f2/EFL的范围,能够合理配制第一镜头和第二镜头的光焦度,有利于缩短摄像模组的对焦行程、提高摄像模组的对焦能力、实现摄像模组在微距状态下的拍摄,在拍摄不同距离的物体时有良好的画质、成像清晰度高。It can be understood that by reasonably limiting the range of f1/EFL and f2/EFL, the optical focal length of the first lens and the second lens can be reasonably configured, which is conducive to shortening the focusing stroke of the camera module, improving the focusing ability of the camera module, and realizing the shooting of the camera module in a macro state, so as to have good image quality and high imaging clarity when shooting objects at different distances.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二镜头包括至少一片阿贝数小于40的透镜。In a possible implementation, the second lens includes at least one lens with an Abbe number less than 40.
可以理解的是,第二镜头可以包括至少一片具有高色散的透镜,通过限定第二镜头内至少一片透镜的阿贝数小于,有利于减少摄像模组中的色差,使得摄像模组具有良好的成像质量。It can be understood that the second lens can include at least one lens with high dispersion. By limiting the Abbe number of at least one lens in the second lens to be less than, it is beneficial to reduce the chromatic aberration in the camera module, so that the camera module has good imaging quality.
在一种可能的实现方式中,摄像模组满足:FOV<50°,其中,FOV为摄像模组在物距为无穷远时的视场角。In a possible implementation, the camera module satisfies: FOV<50°, where FOV is the field of view angle of the camera module when the object distance is infinite.
可以理解的是,通过设置摄像模组的视场角,使得摄像模组具有长焦特性。It can be understood that by setting the field of view angle of the camera module, the camera module has a telephoto characteristic.
在一种可能的实现方式中,摄像模组满足:Fno<3.6,Fno为摄像模组的光圈数。In a possible implementation, the camera module satisfies: Fno<3.6, where Fno is the aperture number of the camera module.
可以理解的是,摄像模组的Fno的数值越小,摄像模组的光圈越大;摄像模组的Fno的数值越大,摄像模组的光圈越小。通过限定摄像模组的Fno的数值,摄像模组具有大光圈的特征。It is understandable that the smaller the value of the camera module's Fno, the larger the aperture of the camera module; the larger the value of the camera module's Fno, the smaller the aperture of the camera module. By limiting the value of the camera module's Fno, the camera module has the characteristic of a large aperture.
在一种可能的实现方式中,马达还包括导向支架、多个第一连接件以及多个第二连接件,导向支架位于防抖支架与基座之间,导向支架通过多个第一连接件连接基座,并通过多个第二连接件连接防抖支架,以使防抖支架与导向支架的相对运动方向不同于导向支架与基座的相对运动方向。In one possible implementation, the motor also includes a guide bracket, multiple first connecting members, and multiple second connecting members. The guide bracket is located between the anti-shake bracket and the base. The guide bracket is connected to the base through multiple first connecting members, and is connected to the anti-shake bracket through multiple second connecting members, so that the relative movement direction between the anti-shake bracket and the guide bracket is different from the relative movement direction between the guide bracket and the base.
可以理解的是,导向支架能够保证防抖支架及基座的连接可靠性,能够实现稳定支撑和准确导向的作用,确保第一防抖线圈与第一防抖磁性件的相对位置及第二防抖线圈与第二防抖磁性件的相对位置的稳定性,马达能够通过基座、第一连接件、导向支架、第二连接件及防抖支架的配合结构,在光学防抖过程中实现精确导向,从而解决传统马达进行光学防抖时出现镜头倾斜过大的问题,使得摄像模组的光学防抖运动平稳、可靠。 It can be understood that the guide bracket can ensure the connection reliability of the anti-shake bracket and the base, can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guidance, and ensure the stability of the relative position of the first anti-shake coil and the first anti-shake magnetic part and the relative position of the second anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake magnetic part. The motor can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base, the first connecting part, the guide bracket, the second connecting part and the anti-shake bracket, thereby solving the problem of excessive lens tilt when the traditional motor performs optical image stabilization, and making the optical image stabilization movement of the camera module smooth and reliable.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基座包括多个第一凹槽,导向支架包括多个第二凹槽和多个第三凹槽,防抖支架包括多个第四凹槽;多个第一连接件与多个第一凹槽、多个第二凹槽一一对应设置,第一连接件的至少部分位于基座的第一凹槽,至少部分位于导向支架的第二凹槽;多个第二连接件与多个第三凹槽和多个第四凹槽一一对应设置,第二连接件的至少部分位于导向支架的第三凹槽,至少部分位于防抖支架的第四凹槽。In one possible implementation, the base includes multiple first grooves, the guide bracket includes multiple second grooves and multiple third grooves, and the anti-shake bracket includes multiple fourth grooves; multiple first connecting members are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple first grooves and the multiple second grooves, and at least part of the first connecting members is located in the first groove of the base, and at least part of it is located in the second groove of the guide bracket; multiple second connecting members are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple third grooves and the multiple fourth grooves, and at least part of the second connecting members is located in the third groove of the guide bracket, and at least part of it is located in the fourth groove of the anti-shake bracket.
可以理解的是,第一凹槽可以对第一连接件进行限位及导向,第一连接件可以在第二凹槽内沿第二方向运动。因此,导向支架也可以相对基座沿平行于第二方向的方向滑动。第三凹槽可以对第二连接件进行限位及导向,第二连接件可以在第四凹槽内沿第一方向运动。因此,防抖支架可以相对基座沿平行于第一方向的方向滑动。It is understood that the first groove can limit and guide the first connecting member, allowing the first connecting member to move in the second direction within the second groove. Therefore, the guide bracket can also slide relative to the base in a direction parallel to the second direction. The third groove can limit and guide the second connecting member, allowing the second connecting member to move in the first direction within the fourth groove. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket can slide relative to the base in a direction parallel to the first direction.
在一种可能的实现方式中,防抖支架通过滚动件活动连接于基座。In a possible implementation, the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base via a rolling member.
可以理解的是,相较于防抖支架通过第二连接件、导向支架以及第一连接件活动连接于基座的方案,防抖支架通过滚动件活动连接于基座的方案的结构更加简单,从而实现马达和摄像模组的小型化设置。It can be understood that compared with the solution in which the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base through the second connecting member, the guide bracket and the first connecting member, the solution in which the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base through a rolling member has a simpler structure, thereby realizing the miniaturization of the motor and the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基座包括第一滚动槽,防抖支架包括第二滚动槽;滚动件的至少部分位于基座的第一滚动槽,至少部分位于防抖支架的第二滚动槽。In a possible implementation, the base includes a first rolling groove, and the anti-shake bracket includes a second rolling groove; at least part of the rolling element is located in the first rolling groove of the base, and at least part of the rolling element is located in the second rolling groove of the anti-shake bracket.
可以理解的是,滚动件可以在第一滚动槽内沿第一方向和/或第二方向滚动,防抖支架的第二滚动槽可以对滚动件进行限位。可以理解的是,防抖支架和滚动件可以一起相对基座在-平面上沿任意方向运动,防抖支架与基座之间的相对运动能够更加可控。It is understood that the rolling element can roll in the first and/or second directions within the first rolling groove, and the second rolling groove of the anti-shake bracket can limit the rolling element. It is also understood that the anti-shake bracket and the rolling element can move together in any direction relative to the base on a single plane, making the relative movement between the anti-shake bracket and the base more controllable.
在一种可能的实现方式中,防抖驱动机构包括第一防抖线圈、第一防抖磁性件、第二防抖线圈以及第二防抖磁性件,第一防抖线圈和第二防抖线圈固定于基座,第一防抖磁性件和第二防抖磁性件固定于防抖支架;第一防抖线圈面向第一防抖磁性件设置,用以驱动防抖支架相对基座沿第一方向运动,第二防抖线圈面向第二防抖磁性件设置,用以驱动防抖支架相对基座沿第二方向运动。In one possible implementation, the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a first anti-shake coil, a first anti-shake magnetic component, a second anti-shake coil and a second anti-shake magnetic component. The first anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake coil are fixed to the base, and the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component are fixed to the anti-shake bracket; the first anti-shake coil is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component to drive the anti-shake bracket to move in a first direction relative to the base, and the second anti-shake coil is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component to drive the anti-shake bracket to move in a second direction relative to the base.
可以理解的是,在第一防抖线圈、第一防抖磁性件、第二防抖线圈以及第二防抖磁性件的驱动下,防抖支架能够带动第一镜头,沿第一方向和/或第二方向相对基座运动,从而实现第一镜头在-平面的运动。It can be understood that, driven by the first anti-shake coil, the first anti-shake magnetic component, the second anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake magnetic component, the anti-shake bracket can drive the first lens to move relative to the base in the first direction and/or the second direction, thereby realizing the movement of the first lens in the -plane.
在一种可能的实现方式中,防抖驱动机构包括第一防抖传感器,第一防抖传感器固定于基座,并位于第一防抖线圈的内侧,用以检测防抖支架在第一方向上的位置变化;防抖驱动机构包括第二防抖传感器,第二防抖传感器固定于基座,并位于第二防抖线圈的内侧,用以检测防抖支架在第二方向上的位置变化。In one possible implementation, the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a first anti-shake sensor, which is fixed to the base and located on the inner side of the first anti-shake coil, and is used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket in the first direction; the anti-shake drive mechanism includes a second anti-shake sensor, which is fixed to the base and located on the inner side of the second anti-shake coil, and is used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket in the second direction.
可以理解的是,第一防抖传感器和第二防抖传感器能够检测防抖支架的位置变化,摄像模组能够根据检测结果来调节防抖支架的位置,从而达到更好的光学防抖效果。It can be understood that the first anti-shake sensor and the second anti-shake sensor can detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket, and the camera module can adjust the position of the anti-shake bracket according to the detection results, so as to achieve a better optical anti-shake effect.
在一种可能的实现方式中,马达还包括对焦电路板,对焦电路板固定于防抖支架;对焦驱动机构包括对焦线圈和对焦磁性件,对焦线圈固定于对焦电路板,对焦磁性件固定于对焦支架,对焦线圈面向对焦磁性件设置,用以驱动对焦支架相对防抖支架沿第三方向运动。In one possible implementation, the motor also includes a focusing circuit board, which is fixed to the anti-shake bracket; the focusing drive mechanism includes a focusing coil and a focusing magnetic part, the focusing coil is fixed to the focusing circuit board, and the focusing magnetic part is fixed to the focusing bracket, and the focusing coil is arranged facing the focusing magnetic part to drive the focusing bracket to move along a third direction relative to the anti-shake bracket.
可以理解的是,对焦线圈和对焦磁性件驱动对焦支架沿第三方向运动,从而带动第二镜头沿第三方向运动,进而实现摄像模组的自动对焦。其中,在第二镜头进行自动对焦时,第一镜头和第二镜头之间在第三方向的相对距离会产生变化,而较小的距离变化就可以实现较大的焦距改变,有利于提高摄像模组的对焦能力。可以理解的是,对焦行程较短的第二镜头能够实现马达在微距状态下的自动对焦,从而提高摄像模组在微距状态下的成像质量。It is understandable that the focusing coil and the focusing magnetic part drive the focusing bracket to move along the third direction, thereby driving the second lens to move along the third direction, thereby realizing the automatic focus of the camera module. Among them, when the second lens is automatically focusing, the relative distance between the first lens and the second lens in the third direction will change, and a smaller distance change can achieve a larger focal length change, which is beneficial to improving the focusing ability of the camera module. It is understandable that the second lens with a shorter focusing stroke can realize the automatic focus of the motor in the macro state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module in the macro state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,入射面和出射面位于棱镜组件的同一侧。In a possible implementation, the incident surface and the exit surface are located on the same side of the prism assembly.
可以理解的是,光线在棱镜组件内能够实现至少三次反射,摄像模组具有较长的光路行程,有利于摄像模组在长焦状态下的拍摄。It can be understood that the light can be reflected at least three times in the prism assembly, and the camera module has a longer optical path, which is conducive to shooting in the telephoto state of the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,入射面和出射面位于棱镜组件的不同侧。In a possible implementation, the incident surface and the exit surface are located on different sides of the prism assembly.
可以理解的是,光线在棱镜组件内能够实现至少两次反射,摄像模组具有更长的光路行程,更加有利于摄像模组在长焦状态下的拍摄。It can be understood that the light can be reflected at least twice in the prism assembly, and the camera module has a longer optical path, which is more conducive to shooting in the telephoto state of the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,棱镜组件包括棱镜和棱镜支架,棱镜安装于棱镜支架上;棱镜包括第一表面、第二表面、第一侧面以及第二侧面,第一侧面和第二侧面连接第一表面和第二表面,第一表面和第二表面背向设置;棱镜组件还包括遮光片,遮光片固定于棱镜的第一表面,遮光片将第一表面分隔形成入射面和出射面。In one possible implementation, the prism assembly includes a prism and a prism bracket, and the prism is mounted on the prism bracket; the prism includes a first surface, a second surface, a first side surface and a second side surface, the first side surface and the second side surface are connected to the first surface and the second surface, and the first surface and the second surface are arranged back to back; the prism assembly also includes a light-shielding plate, which is fixed to the first surface of the prism, and the light-shielding plate separates the first surface to form an incident surface and an exit surface.
可以理解的是,在进入棱镜之后,光线能够在棱镜的内部发生至少三次折转。这样,摄像模组的光路行程较大,能够实现在长焦状态时的拍摄,从而提高摄像模组在长焦状态下的成像质量。It is understood that after entering the prism, the light can be refracted at least three times inside the prism. In this way, the optical path of the camera module is larger, which can achieve shooting in the telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module in the telephoto state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图像传感器组件包括图像传感器和电路板,电路板包括第一板部、第二板 部以及第三板部,第二板部连接第一板部和第三板部,第一板部和第三板部相对且间隔设置;图像传感器固定于电路板的第一板部的朝向第三板部的一侧,且电连接电路板;棱镜组件固定于电路板的第三板部,且至少部分位于第一板部与第三板部之间。In a possible implementation, the image sensor assembly includes an image sensor and a circuit board, wherein the circuit board includes a first board portion, a second board portion, and a The first and third board portions are connected to each other, and the first and third board portions are arranged opposite to each other and spaced apart. The image sensor is fixed to the side of the first board portion of the circuit board facing the third board portion and is electrically connected to the circuit board. The prism assembly is fixed to the third board portion of the circuit board and is at least partially located between the first and third board portions.
可以理解的是,通过设置图像传感器组件与棱镜组件固定连接、棱镜组件的出射面面向图像传感器,光线在棱镜组件内部的反射光路较长,满足摄像模组的长焦特性,提高摄像模组的长焦拍摄性能。It can be understood that by setting the image sensor assembly and the prism assembly to be fixedly connected and the output surface of the prism assembly facing the image sensor, the reflected light path inside the prism assembly is longer, which meets the telephoto characteristics of the camera module and improves the telephoto shooting performance of the camera module.
在一种可能的实现方式中,棱镜组件包括棱镜和棱镜支架,棱镜安装于棱镜支架上;棱镜包括第一表面、第二表面、第一侧面以及第二侧面,第一侧面和第二侧面连接第一表面和第二表面,第一表面和第二表面背向设置,第一侧面和第二侧面背向设置;第一表面的一部分形成入射面,第二表面的一部分形成出射面。In one possible implementation, the prism assembly includes a prism and a prism holder, and the prism is mounted on the prism holder; the prism includes a first surface, a second surface, a first side surface and a second side surface, the first side surface and the second side surface are connected to the first surface and the second surface, the first surface and the second surface are arranged back to back, and the first side surface and the second side surface are arranged back to back; a portion of the first surface forms an incident surface, and a portion of the second surface forms an exit surface.
可以理解的是,在进入棱镜之后,光线能够在棱镜的内部发生至少四次折转。这样,摄像模组的光路行程较大,能够实现在长焦状态时的拍摄,从而提高摄像模组在长焦状态下的成像质量。It is understood that after entering the prism, the light can be refracted at least four times inside the prism. In this way, the optical path of the camera module is larger, which can achieve shooting in the telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module in the telephoto state.
可以理解的是,相比于棱镜的入射面和出射面位于同一表面的方案,棱镜的入射面和出射面位于不同表面的方案能够使光线在棱镜内进行至少四次折转,能够具有更长的总光路长度,长焦状态下的成像质量更高。It can be understood that compared with the solution in which the incident surface and the exit surface of the prism are located on the same surface, the solution in which the incident surface and the exit surface of the prism are located on different surfaces can enable the light to be refracted at least four times within the prism, can have a longer total optical path length, and have higher imaging quality in the telephoto state.
第二方面,本申请提供一种电子设备。电子设备包括壳体和上述的摄像模组,摄像模组设于壳体内。In a second aspect, the present application provides an electronic device, which includes a housing and the aforementioned camera module, wherein the camera module is disposed in the housing.
可以理解的是,电子设备的结构设置较合理,电子设备在进行拍摄时,电子设备的光学防抖性能和自动对焦性能均较佳,用户体验感较佳。此外,摄像模组的对焦行程较短,摄像模组在电子设备的厚度方向上的尺寸需求较小,有利于电子设备的薄型化设置。It is understandable that the electronic device has a more reasonable structural configuration, and when shooting, the electronic device has better optical image stabilization and autofocus performance, providing a better user experience. In addition, the camera module has a shorter focus stroke, and the camera module has a smaller size requirement in the thickness direction of the electronic device, which is conducive to the thinning of the electronic device.
图1是本申请实施方式提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2是图1所示的电子设备在A-A线处的一种实施方式中的部分剖面示意图;FIG2 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electronic device shown in FIG1 taken along line A-A;
图3是图1所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式中的结构示意图;FIG3 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG1 in one embodiment;
图4是图3所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构分解示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the camera module shown in FIG3 in one embodiment;
图5是图4所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构分解示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the motor shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图6是图5所示的基座在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图;FIG6 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图7是图6所示的基座在另一种角度的结构示意图;FIG7 is a schematic structural diagram of the base shown in FIG6 at another angle;
图8是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一;FIG8 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图9是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二;FIG9 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图10是图5所示的导向支架在一种实施方式的放大结构示意图;FIG10 is an enlarged structural schematic diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图11是图10所示的导向支架在另一种角度的结构示意图;FIG11 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG10 at another angle;
图12是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图三;FIG12 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图13是图12所示的马达在B-B线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG13 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the motor shown in FIG12 taken along line B-B;
图14是图5所示的防抖支架在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图;FIG14 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图15是图14所示的防抖支架在另一种角度的结构示意图;FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG14 at another angle;
图16是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图四;FIG16 is a fourth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图17是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图五;FIG17 is a fifth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图18是图4所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一;FIG18 is a partial structural assembly diagram 1 of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图19是图18所示的摄像模组在C-C线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG19 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG18 taken along line C-C;
图20是图18所示的摄像模组在D-D线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG20 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG18 taken along line D-D;
图21是图5所示的对焦电路板在另一种角度的结构放大示意图;FIG21 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the focusing circuit board shown in FIG5 at another angle;
图22是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图六;FIG22 is a sixth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图23是图5所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图七;FIG23 is a seventh diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG5 in one embodiment;
图24是图4所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二;FIG24 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图25是图24所示的摄像模组在E-E线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG25 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG24 taken along line E-E;
图26是图24所示的摄像模组在F-F线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG26 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG24 taken along line F-F;
图27是图4所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图三;FIG27 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图28是图5所示的外壳在另一种角度的结构放大示意图;FIG28 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the housing shown in FIG5 at another angle;
图29是图3所示的摄像模组在G-G线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG29 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line G-G;
图30是图4所示的棱镜组件在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图; FIG30 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图31是图30所示的棱镜组件在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图;FIG31 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the prism assembly shown in FIG30 in one embodiment;
图32是图30所示的棱镜支架在另一种角度的结构放大示意图;FIG32 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket shown in FIG30 at another angle;
图33是图3所示的摄像模组在H-H线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图一;FIG33 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line H-H;
图34是图4所示的图像传感器组件在一种实施方式的分解示意图;FIG34 is an exploded schematic diagram of the image sensor assembly shown in FIG4 in one embodiment;
图35是图4所示的图像传感器组件在I-I线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG35 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly shown in FIG4 taken along line I-I;
图36是图3所示的摄像模组在H-H线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图二;FIG36 is a second partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 taken along line H-H;
图37是本申请第一种实施例提供的摄像模组在物距为无穷远时的远景工作状态时的结构示意图;FIG37 is a structural diagram of the camera module provided by the first embodiment of the present application in a long-range working state when the object distance is infinite;
图38是图37所示的摄像模组在微距拍摄时的近景工作状态时的结构示意图;FIG38 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG37 in a close-up working state during macro shooting;
图39是本申请第二种实施例提供的摄像模组在物距为无穷远时的远景工作状态时的结构示意图;FIG39 is a structural diagram of a camera module provided by a second embodiment of the present application in a long-range working state when the object distance is infinite;
图40是图39所示的摄像模组在微距拍摄时的近景工作状态时的结构示意图;FIG40 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG39 in a close-up working state during macro shooting;
图41是图3所示的摄像模组在另一种实施方式的结构示意图;FIG41 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG3 in another embodiment;
图42是图41所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构分解图;FIG42 is an exploded view of a portion of the camera module shown in FIG41 in one embodiment;
图43是图42所示的基座在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图;FIG43 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base shown in FIG42 in one embodiment;
图44是图42所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一;FIG44 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the motor shown in FIG42 in one embodiment;
图45是图42所示的防抖支架在一种实施方式的结构示意图;FIG45 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG42 in one embodiment;
图46是图45所示的防抖支架在另一种角度的结构示意图;FIG46 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG45 at another angle;
图47是图41所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图;FIG47 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module shown in FIG41 in one embodiment;
图48是图47所示的摄像模组在J-J线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG48 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line J-J;
图49是图47所示的摄像模组在K-K线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG49 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line K-K;
图50是图47所示的摄像模组在L-L线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG50 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG47 taken along line L-L;
图51是图42所示的马达在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二;FIG51 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor shown in FIG42 in one embodiment;
图52是图3所示的摄像模组在再一种实施方式的结构示意图;FIG52 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG3 in yet another embodiment;
图53是图52所示的摄像模组在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;FIG53 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG52 in one embodiment;
图54是图53所示的棱镜组件在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图;FIG54 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly shown in FIG53 in one embodiment;
图55是图54所示的棱镜支架在另一种角度的结构放大示意图;FIG55 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket shown in FIG54 at another angle;
图56是图52所示的摄像模组在M-M线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图一;FIG56 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG52 taken along line M-M;
图57是图53的图像传感器组件在N-N线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图;FIG57 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of one embodiment of the image sensor assembly of FIG53 taken along line N-N;
图58是图52所示的摄像模组在M-M线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图二。Figure 58 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
为方便理解,下面先对本申请实施例所涉及的英文简写和有关技术术语进行解释和描述。For ease of understanding, the English abbreviations and related technical terms involved in the embodiments of this application are explained and described below.
物侧,以透镜为界,待成像景物所在的一侧为物侧。The object side, with the lens as the boundary, is the side where the scene to be imaged is located.
像侧,以透镜为界,待成像景物的图像所在的一侧为像侧。The image side is the side where the image of the scene to be imaged is located, with the lens as the boundary.
物侧面,以透镜为界,被摄物体所在一侧为物侧,透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面,也称为物面。The object side, with the lens as the boundary, the side where the object is located is the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side, also known as the object plane.
像侧面,以透镜为界,被摄物体的图像所在的一侧为像侧,透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面,也称为像面。The image side, with the lens as the boundary, the side where the image of the object is located is called the image side, and the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side, also known as the image plane.
光轴,是一条垂直穿过理想镜片中心的光线。与光轴平行的光线射入凸镜片时,理想的凸镜应是所有的光线会聚在镜片后的一点,这个会聚所有光线的一点,即为焦点。光线沿着光轴进行传播时,其传输方向不会发生改变。The optical axis is a ray of light that passes perpendicularly through the center of an ideal lens. When light rays parallel to the optical axis enter a convex lens, all rays converge at a single point behind the lens. This point is the focal point. As light rays propagate along the optical axis, their direction of travel remains unchanged.
焦距(focal length),也称为焦长,是光学系统中衡量光的聚集或发散的度量方式,指无限远的景物通过透镜或透镜组在焦平面结成清晰影像时,透镜或透镜组的光学中心至焦平面的垂直距离。对于薄透镜,焦距即为透镜中心到成像面的距离;对于厚镜片或者镜片组,焦距等于有效焦距,即为镜片或者镜片组的后主平面至成像面之间的距离。Focal length, also known as focal length, is a measure of the convergence or divergence of light in an optical system. It is the vertical distance from the optical center of a lens or lens group to the focal plane, when a sharp image of an infinitely distant object is formed on the focal plane. For thin lenses, the focal length is the distance from the lens center to the image plane. For thick lenses or lens groups, the focal length is equal to the effective focal length, which is the distance from the rear principal plane of the lens or lens group to the image plane.
有效焦距(effect focal length,EFL),定义为摄像模组的中心至焦点的距离。Effective focal length (EFL) is defined as the distance from the center of the camera module to the focal point.
光焦度(focal power),定义为像侧光束会聚度与物侧光束会聚度之差,是镜头的焦距的倒数,它表征光学系统偏折光线的能力。Focal power, defined as the difference between the image-side beam convergence and the object-side beam convergence, is the reciprocal of the focal length of the lens. It characterizes the ability of an optical system to deflect light.
正光焦度,也可以称为正折光力,表示透镜有正的焦距,可将光线聚拢。Positive optical power, also called positive refractive power, means that the lens has a positive focal length and can focus light.
负光焦度,也可以称为负折光力,表示透镜有负的焦距,可将光线发散。Negative optical power, also known as negative refractive power, means that the lens has a negative focal length and can diverge light.
光圈,是用来控制光线透过镜头,进入机身内感光面光量的装置,它通常是在镜头内。The aperture is a device used to control the amount of light that passes through the lens and enters the photosensitive surface inside the camera body. It is usually inside the lens.
光圈数,又称F数(Fno),是镜头的焦距/镜头入瞳直径得出的相对值(相对孔径的倒数)。光圈值越 小,在同一单位时间内的进光量便越多。光圈值越大,景深越小,拍照的背景内容将会虚化,类似长焦镜头的效果。Aperture number, also known as F number (Fno), is the relative value obtained by dividing the focal length of the lens by the diameter of the lens entrance pupil (the inverse of the relative aperture). The smaller the aperture, the more light enters in the same unit time. The larger the aperture value, the smaller the depth of field, and the background content in the photo will be blurred, similar to the effect of a telephoto lens.
视场角(field of view,FOV),在光学仪器中,以光学仪器的镜头为顶点,以被测目标的物像可通过镜头的最大范围的两条边缘构成的夹角,称为视场角。视场角的大小决定了光学仪器的视野范围,视场角越大,视野就越大,光学倍率就越小。In optical instruments, the field of view (FOV) is the angle between the two edges of the maximum range through which the image of the measured object can pass, with the lens as the vertex. The field of view determines the visual range of the optical instrument. A larger field of view means a wider field of view and a smaller optical magnification.
成像面的像高(Imaging Height,IH),表示的是感光芯片上有效像素区域对角线长的一半,也即成像圆的半径。The image height (Imaging Height, IH) of the imaging surface represents half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area on the photosensitive chip, which is also the radius of the imaging circle.
阿贝数(Abbe),即色散系数,是光学材料在不同波长下的折射率的差值比,代表材料的色散程度的大小。The Abbe number (Abbe), also known as the dispersion coefficient, is the difference ratio of the refractive index of an optical material at different wavelengths, representing the degree of dispersion of the material.
折射率(Nd),定义为在电磁波(包括可见光)在材料中传播时,光线的传播速度与真空中光速之比的绝对值,是描述材料对光的传播速度和弯曲程度的指标。The refractive index (Nd) is defined as the absolute value of the ratio of the propagation speed of electromagnetic waves (including visible light) to the speed of light in a vacuum when propagating in a material. It is an indicator that describes the propagation speed and bending degree of light in a material.
下面将结合本申请实施方式中的附图,对本申请实施方式中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and completely below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
在本申请的描述中,需要说明的是,除非另有规定和限定,术语“安装”、“相连”、“连接”、“接”应做广义理解,例如,“连接”可以是可拆卸地连接,也可以是不可拆卸地连接;可以是直接连接,也可以通过中间媒介间接连接;可以是电连接,也可以是机械连接。其中,“固定连接”是指彼此连接且连接后的相对位置关系不变。“活动连接”是指彼此连接且连接后能够相对运动。“滑动连接”是指彼此连接且连接后能够相对滑动。另外,两个部件通过一体成型工艺得到一体化结构是指,在形成两个部件中的其中一个部件的过程中,该部件即与另一个部件连接在一起,不需要通过再次加工(如粘接、焊接、卡扣连接、螺钉连接)方式将两个部件连接在一起。部件A和部件B相对设置可以是,部件A沿目标方向投影得到投影C,部件B沿目标方向投影得到投影D,投影C和投影D可以至少大部分重叠。在一些实施方式中,大部分重叠可以是以下任一种情况:投影C完全位于投影D内。或者,投影D完全位于投影C内。或者,投影C和投影D相互交叉,且投影C和投影D的交叉区域占投影C或投影D的比例高于50%。In the description of this application, it should be noted that, unless otherwise specified or limited, the terms "mounted," "connected," "connected," and "connected" should be understood broadly. For example, "connected" can mean a removable or non-removable connection; a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediary; an electrical connection or a mechanical connection. A "fixed connection" refers to a connection in which the relative positional relationship remains unchanged after connection. A "movable connection" refers to a connection in which the connection enables relative movement. A "sliding connection" refers to a connection in which the connection enables relative sliding. Furthermore, two components forming an integrated structure through an integral molding process mean that, during the formation of one of the two components, the component is immediately connected to the other, without the need for further processing (such as bonding, welding, snap-fit connection, or screw connection) to connect the two components. Components A and B can be arranged relative to each other so that component A is projected along a target direction to form projection C, and component B is projected along the target direction to form projection D, and projections C and D can at least substantially overlap. In some embodiments, the substantial overlap can be any of the following: projection C is completely within projection D. Alternatively, projection D is completely within projection C. Alternatively, projection C and projection D intersect each other, and the intersection area of projection C and projection D accounts for a ratio of projection C or projection D that is greater than 50%.
本申请实施例中所提到的方位用语,例如,“顶”、“底”、“内”、“外”等,仅是参考附图的方向,因此,使用的方位用语是为了更好、更清楚地说明及理解本申请实施方式,而不是指示或暗指所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作,因此不能理解为对本申请实施方式的限制。对于本领域的普通技术人员而言,可以根据具体情况理解上述术语的具体含义。The directional terms mentioned in the embodiments of this application, such as "top", "bottom", "inside", "outside", etc., are only used to refer to the directions in the drawings. Therefore, the directional terms used are for better and clearer description and understanding of the embodiments of this application, and do not indicate or imply that the devices or components referred to must have a specific orientation, be constructed and operate in a specific orientation. Therefore, they should not be understood as limiting the embodiments of this application. For those skilled in the art, the specific meanings of the above terms can be understood according to specific circumstances.
本申请的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象,而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便本申请的实施方式能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施,且“第一”、“第二”等所区分的对象通常为一类,并不限定对象的个数,例如第一对象可以是一个,也可以是多个。此外,说明书以及权利要求中“和/或”表示所连接对象的至少其中之一,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“多个”是指至少两个。The terms "first", "second", etc. in the specification and claims of this application are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the data used in this way can be interchangeable where appropriate, so that the embodiments of this application can be implemented in an order other than those illustrated or described here, and the objects distinguished by "first", "second", etc. are generally of the same type, and do not limit the number of objects. For example, the first object can be one or more. In addition, "and/or" in the specification and claims represents at least one of the connected objects, and the character "/" generally indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship. "Multiple" means at least two.
另外,在本申请实施例中,提到的相对位置关系的限定,例如平行、垂直、对齐等。这些限定,均是针对当前工艺水平而言的,而不是绝对严格的限定,允许存在少量偏差,近似于平行、近似于垂直、近似于对齐等均可以。例如,A与B平行,是指A与B之间平行或者近似于平行,A与B之间的夹角在0度至10度之间均可。例如,A与B垂直,是指A与B之间垂直或者近似于垂直,A与B之间的夹角在80度至100度之间均可。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the limitations of the relative position relationship mentioned, such as parallel, perpendicular, aligned, etc., are all for the current state of the art, rather than absolutely strict limitations, and a small amount of deviation is allowed, and it is possible to be approximately parallel, approximately perpendicular, approximately aligned, etc. For example, A and B are parallel, which means that A and B are parallel or approximately parallel, and the angle between A and B can be between 0 degrees and 10 degrees. For example, A and B are perpendicular, which means that A and B are perpendicular or approximately perpendicular, and the angle between A and B can be between 80 degrees and 100 degrees.
图1是本申请实施方式提供的一种电子设备1000的结构示意图。FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 1000 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,电子设备1000可以为手机、平板电脑(tablet personal computer)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、个人数码助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、照相机、个人计算机、笔记本电脑、车载设备、可穿戴设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)眼镜、AR头盔、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)眼镜或者VR头盔等具有摄像头模组的设备。本申请实施方式的电子设备1000以手机为例进行阐述。As shown in FIG1 , electronic device 1000 may be a device with a camera module, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer (personal computer), a laptop computer, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a camera, a personal computer, a notebook computer, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, augmented reality (AR) glasses, an AR helmet, virtual reality (VR) glasses, or a VR helmet. The electronic device 1000 of the present embodiment is described using a mobile phone as an example.
图2是图1所示的电子设备1000在A-A线处的一种实施方式中的部分剖面示意图。FIG2 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electronic device 1000 shown in FIG1 at line A-A.
如图1和图2所示,一些实施方式中,电子设备1000可以包括摄像模组100、壳体200以及屏幕300。其中,摄像模组100可以为后置摄像模组100,也可以为前置摄像模组100。可以理解的是,图1以及下文相关附图仅示意性的示出了电子设备1000包括的一些部件,这些部件的实际形状、实际大小、实际位置和实际构造不受图1以及下文各附图限定。此外,当电子设备1000为一些其他形态的设备时,电子设备1000也可以不包括屏幕300。As shown in Figures 1 and 2, in some embodiments, the electronic device 1000 may include a camera module 100, a housing 200, and a screen 300. The camera module 100 may be a rear camera module 100 or a front camera module 100. It will be understood that Figure 1 and the related figures below only schematically illustrate some components included in the electronic device 1000, and the actual shape, actual size, actual position, and actual structure of these components are not limited by Figure 1 and the figures below. In addition, when the electronic device 1000 is a device of some other form, the electronic device 1000 may also not include the screen 300.
可以理解的是,后文中为了便于描述,定义摄像模组100具有第一方向X、第二方向Y以及第三方向 Z,第一方向X、第二方向Y以及第三方向Z彼此不同。示例性地,第一方向X可以为摄像模组100的长度方向,第二方向Y可以为摄像模组100的宽度方向,第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X,第三方向Z可以为摄像模组100的高度方向,第三方向Z垂直于第一方向X和第二方向Y。在其他实施方式中,摄像模组100的坐标系设置可以根据具体实际需要灵活设置。It is understood that, for the sake of convenience in the following description, the camera module 100 is defined as having a first direction X, a second direction Y and a third direction The first direction X, the second direction Y, and the third direction Z are different from each other. For example, the first direction X may be the length direction of the camera module 100, the second direction Y may be the width direction of the camera module 100, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X. The third direction Z may be the height direction of the camera module 100, and the third direction Z is perpendicular to the first direction X and the second direction Y. In other embodiments, the coordinate system of the camera module 100 can be flexibly set according to specific actual needs.
如图1和图2所示,一些实施例中,屏幕300安装于壳体200,并与壳体200共同围出电子设备1000的内部。电子设备1000的内部可以用于放置电子设备1000的器件,例如电池、受话器或者麦克风等。其中,屏幕300可以为平面屏,也可以为曲面屏。As shown in Figures 1 and 2, in some embodiments, screen 300 is mounted on housing 200 and, together with housing 200, encloses the interior of electronic device 1000. The interior of electronic device 1000 can be used to house components of electronic device 1000, such as a battery, receiver, or microphone. Screen 300 can be either flat or curved.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以位于电子设备1000的内部。壳体200具有透光部201。透光部201的形状不仅限于附图1所示意的圆形,也可以是椭圆形或者不规则的形状。电子设备1000外部的光线可以通过透光部201进入电子设备1000的内部。摄像模组100可以采集进入电子设备1000内部的光线。透光部201可以是透光孔,也可以是壳体200中的透明部分。关于透光部201的具体结构本申请不做具体地限定。Exemplarily, the camera module 100 can be located inside the electronic device 1000. The housing 200 has a light-transmitting portion 201. The shape of the light-transmitting portion 201 is not limited to the circular shape shown in FIG1 , but can also be an elliptical or irregular shape. Light from outside the electronic device 1000 can enter the interior of the electronic device 1000 through the light-transmitting portion 201. The camera module 100 can collect light entering the interior of the electronic device 1000. The light-transmitting portion 201 can be a light-transmitting hole or a transparent portion in the housing 200. This application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the light-transmitting portion 201.
图3是图1所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式中的结构示意图。图4是图3所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构分解示意图。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 1 in one embodiment. Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 3 in one embodiment.
如图3和图4所示,摄像模组100包括马达1、第一镜头2、第二镜头3、棱镜组件4和图像传感器组件5。可以理解的是,摄像模组100还可以包括更少或者更多的结构。例如,摄像模组100还可以包括可变光圈(附图中均未示出)。As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the camera module 100 includes a motor 1, a first lens 2, a second lens 3, a prism assembly 4, and an image sensor assembly 5. It is understood that the camera module 100 may also include fewer or more structures. For example, the camera module 100 may also include a variable aperture (not shown in the figures).
在一种实施方式中,第一镜头2和第二镜头3可以安装在马达1上。In one embodiment, the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 may be mounted on the motor 1 .
其中,马达1可以通过控制第一镜头2和第二镜头3沿垂直于第三方向Z的平面(也即X-Y平面)运动,以实现光学防抖。这样,当摄像模组100采集环境光线时,若电子设备1000因外力作用而在X-Y平面产生抖动,则可以通过马达1控制第一镜头2和第二镜头3在X-Y平面上的运动,抵消第一镜头2和第二镜头3在X-Y平面产生的抖动行程,以避免或者减少第一镜头2和第二镜头3因抖动而导致的位置偏置。换言之,本申请的摄像模组100可以通过马达1控制第一镜头2和第二镜头3在X-Y平面上运动,实现摄像模组100的光学图像防抖(optical image stabilization,OIS),提高摄像模组100的成像质量。Among them, the motor 1 can achieve optical image stabilization by controlling the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move along a plane perpendicular to the third direction Z (that is, the X-Y plane). In this way, when the camera module 100 collects ambient light, if the electronic device 1000 shakes in the X-Y plane due to external force, the movement of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane can be controlled by the motor 1 to offset the shaking stroke of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane, so as to avoid or reduce the position offset of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 caused by shaking. In other words, the camera module 100 of the present application can control the movement of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 on the X-Y plane by the motor 1 to achieve optical image stabilization (OIS) of the camera module 100 and improve the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
此外,马达1还可以通过控制第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动,以实现自动对焦(auto focus,AF)。可以理解的是,相较于马达1同时控制第一镜头2和第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动的方案,本实施方式的马达1可以不需要控制第一镜头2沿第三方向Z运动,这样,摄像模组100的对焦行程较短。Furthermore, the motor 1 can also achieve auto focus (AF) by controlling the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z. It is understood that, compared to the solution in which the motor 1 simultaneously controls the movement of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 along the third direction Z, the motor 1 in this embodiment does not need to control the movement of the first lens 2 along the third direction Z. Thus, the focusing stroke of the camera module 100 is shortened.
如图2和图4所示,示例性地,马达1具有避让空间1a。示例性地,避让空间1a可以将马达1的内部连通至马达1的外部。As shown in Figures 2 and 4 , the motor 1 has an escape space 1a, which can connect the inside of the motor 1 to the outside of the motor 1.
如图2和图4所示,示例性地,棱镜组件4包括棱镜41和棱镜支架42,棱镜41可以固定连接于棱镜支架42。As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 4 , illustratively, the prism assembly 4 includes a prism 41 and a prism bracket 42 , and the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42 .
示例性地,棱镜41具有入射面S7和出射面S11。棱镜41的入射面S7和出射面S11可以位于棱镜41的同一侧。在其他的实施方式中,棱镜41的入射面S7和出射面S11也可以分别位于棱镜41的不同侧。Illustratively, the prism 41 has an incident surface S7 and an exit surface S11. The incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the same side of the prism 41. In other embodiments, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may also be located on different sides of the prism 41.
如图2和图4所示,示例性地,棱镜组件4的至少部分可以位于马达1的避让空间1a。这样,一方面,棱镜组件4可以更好地利用马达1的避让空间1a,提高马达1的空间利用率。另一方面,棱镜组件4与马达排布更加紧凑,有利于摄像模组100的小型化设置。此外,马达1的至少部分与棱镜41的入射面S7相对设置,以使穿过第一镜头2和第二镜头3的光线能够进入棱镜41内。As shown in Figures 2 and 4, for example, at least a portion of the prism assembly 4 can be located in the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1. In this way, on the one hand, the prism assembly 4 can better utilize the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1, thereby improving the space utilization rate of the motor 1. On the other hand, the prism assembly 4 and the motor are arranged more compactly, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the camera module 100. In addition, at least a portion of the motor 1 is arranged relative to the incident surface S7 of the prism 41, so that light passing through the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can enter the prism 41.
如图2至图4所示,示例性地,图像传感器组件5与棱镜41的出射面S11相对设置,以使穿过棱镜41的光线可以进入图像传感器组件5内。As shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4 , illustratively, the image sensor assembly 5 is disposed opposite to the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 , so that light passing through the prism 41 can enter the image sensor assembly 5 .
可以理解的是,示例性地,光线自电子设备1000的透光部201进入摄像模组100,依次经过第二镜头3、第一镜头2以及棱镜41的入射面S7后进入棱镜41的内部。光线在棱镜41的内部发生至少三次反射后,经过棱镜41的出射面S11到达图像传感器组件5,图像传感器组件5将光线所携带的图像信息转化为电信号。It is understood that, illustratively, light enters the camera module 100 from the light-transmitting portion 201 of the electronic device 1000, passes through the second lens 3, the first lens 2, and the incident surface S7 of the prism 41, and then enters the interior of the prism 41. After being reflected at least three times inside the prism 41, the light passes through the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 and reaches the image sensor assembly 5. The image sensor assembly 5 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal.
图5是图4所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构分解示意图。FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a partial structural decomposition of the motor 1 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
如图5所示,示例性地,马达1包括防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c,通过防抖模块1b驱动第一镜头2和第二镜头3进行光学防抖,通过对焦模块1c驱动第二镜头3进行自动对焦。防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c可以形成一体式的结构。As shown in Figure 5, motor 1 exemplarily includes an anti-shake module 1b and a focus module 1c. The anti-shake module 1b drives the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 for optical image stabilization, while the focus module 1c drives the second lens 3 for autofocus. The anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c can form an integrated structure.
示例性地,防抖模块1b包括基座11、马达电路板12、第一连接件131、第二连接件132、第三连接件133、防抖驱动机构14、导向支架15以及防抖支架16。其中,防抖驱动机构14包括第一防抖线圈141、第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143以及第二防抖磁性件144。其中,第一防抖线圈141与第一防抖 磁性件142对应设置,形成一组驱动机构,第二防抖线圈143与第二防抖磁性件144对应设置,形成另一组驱动机构。第一连接件131和第二连接件132的数量可以均为多个,例如,本实施方式中均以三个为例进行示意。第三连接件133的数量可以为多个,例如,本实施方式中均以两个为例进行示意。For example, the anti-shake module 1b includes a base 11, a motor circuit board 12, a first connecting member 131, a second connecting member 132, a third connecting member 133, an anti-shake driving mechanism 14, a guide bracket 15, and an anti-shake bracket 16. The anti-shake driving mechanism 14 includes a first anti-shake coil 141, a first anti-shake magnetic member 142, a second anti-shake coil 143, and a second anti-shake magnetic member 144. The first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake The magnetic members 142 are arranged in a corresponding manner to form a drive mechanism, and the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 are arranged in a corresponding manner to form another drive mechanism. The number of first connecting members 131 and second connecting members 132 can be multiple, for example, three are used in this embodiment. The number of third connecting members 133 can be multiple, for example, two are used in this embodiment.
示例性地,对焦模块1c包括对焦支架21、对焦驱动机构22以及对焦电路板23。其中,对焦驱动机构22包括对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222。Exemplarily, the focus module 1 c includes a focus bracket 21 , a focus drive mechanism 22 , and a focus circuit board 23 . The focus drive mechanism 22 includes a focus coil 221 and a focus magnetic member 222 .
示例性地,马达1还可以包括压件17和外壳18。Exemplarily, the motor 1 may further include a pressing piece 17 and a housing 18 .
图6是图5所示的基座11在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图。图7是图6所示的基座11在另一种角度的结构示意图。Fig. 6 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in Fig. 5 in one embodiment. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in Fig. 6 at another angle.
如图6和图7所示,示例性地,基座11包括底部111和侧部112。侧部112可以固定连接于底部111,并大致与底部111垂直。As shown in Figures 6 and 7, the base 11 exemplarily includes a bottom 111 and a side portion 112. The side portion 112 can be fixedly connected to the bottom 111 and is substantially perpendicular to the bottom 111.
示例性地,基座11的底部111可以包括第一角部1111、第二角部1112、第三角部1113、第一边部1114以及第二边部1115。示例性地,第一边部1114和第二边部1115可以呈夹角设置。Illustratively, the bottom 111 of the base 11 may include a first corner 1111, a second corner 1112, a third corner 1113, a first side 1114, and a second side 1115. Illustratively, the first side 1114 and the second side 1115 may be arranged at an angle.
示例性地,基座11包括多个第一凹槽113。例如,第一凹槽113的数量可以为三个,三个第一凹槽113可以分别位于底部111的第一角部1111、第二角部1112以及第三角部1113。Exemplarily, the base 11 includes a plurality of first grooves 113. For example, the number of the first grooves 113 can be three, and the three first grooves 113 can be respectively located at the first corner 1111, the second corner 1112, and the third corner 1113 of the bottom 111.
示例性地,基座11的底部111具有通光孔1116,基座11的侧部112包括避让孔1121,底部111的通光孔1116连通侧部112的避让孔1121。Exemplarily, the bottom 111 of the base 11 has a light-through hole 1116 , and the side 112 of the base 11 includes an avoidance hole 1121 . The light-through hole 1116 of the bottom 111 is connected to the avoidance hole 1121 of the side 112 .
示例性地,基座11可以有金属件和绝缘件通过模内注塑(insert-molding)等方式与基座11形成一体结构件。这样,基座11的整体强度较佳。For example, the base 11 may include a metal part and an insulating part formed into an integral structure with the base 11 by insert-molding or the like. In this way, the overall strength of the base 11 is better.
图8是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一。FIG8 is a first partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
如图8所示,示例性地,马达电路板12包括安装部121和引脚端部122。马达电路板12的引脚端部122可以相对安装部121弯折设置。示例性地,马达电路板12的安装部121可以大致呈“L”形。示例性地,安装部121和引脚端部122可以大致垂直设置。As shown in FIG8 , the motor circuit board 12 exemplarily includes a mounting portion 121 and a pin end portion 122. The pin end portion 122 of the motor circuit board 12 can be bent relative to the mounting portion 121. Exemplarily, the mounting portion 121 of the motor circuit board 12 can be substantially L-shaped. Exemplarily, the mounting portion 121 and the pin end portion 122 can be substantially perpendicular.
示例性地,马达电路板12可以固定连接于基座11。其中,马达电路板12的安装部121可以固定连接于基座11的底部111。马达电路板12的引脚端部122可以固定于基座11的底部111的侧面。For example, the motor circuit board 12 can be fixedly connected to the base 11. The mounting portion 121 of the motor circuit board 12 can be fixedly connected to the bottom 111 of the base 11. The pin end 122 of the motor circuit board 12 can be fixed to the side of the bottom 111 of the base 11.
示例性地,第一连接件131可以活动连接于基座11。多个第一连接件131可以一一对应地安装于基座11的多个第一凹槽113。第一凹槽113可以对第一连接件131进行限位。第一连接件131的部分外表面可以相对基座11的底部111凸起。For example, the first connecting member 131 can be movably connected to the base 11. The plurality of first connecting members 131 can be installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of first grooves 113 of the base 11. The first grooves 113 can limit the first connecting members 131. Part of the outer surface of the first connecting member 131 can be raised relative to the bottom 111 of the base 11.
示例性地,第一连接件131可以与基座11内的金属件接触,以减小第一连接件131运动的摩擦系数。For example, the first connecting member 131 may contact a metal member in the base 11 to reduce a friction coefficient of the movement of the first connecting member 131 .
可以理解的是,第一连接件131可以采用滚珠结构。在其他的实施方式中,第一连接件131也可以采用滑轴结构或者其他结构。本申请对第一连接件131的具体结构不作限定。It is understood that the first connecting member 131 can adopt a ball structure. In other embodiments, the first connecting member 131 can also adopt a sliding shaft structure or other structures. The present application does not limit the specific structure of the first connecting member 131.
图9是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二。FIG9 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
如图9所示,第一防抖线圈141可以固定连接于基座11。示例性地,第一防抖线圈141可以通过马达电路板12固定连接于底部111的第一边部1114(请参阅图7)。第一防抖线圈141可以电连接于马达电路板12。在其他的实施方式中,第一防抖线圈141的电连接方式不做具体的限定。例如第一防抖线圈141可以直接电连接于基座11内的导电件(附图中均未示出)。可以理解的是,导电件可以通过模内注塑(insert-molding)等方式形成在基座11内。As shown in Figure 9, the first anti-shake coil 141 can be fixedly connected to the base 11. For example, the first anti-shake coil 141 can be fixedly connected to the first side 1114 of the bottom 111 through the motor circuit board 12 (see Figure 7). The first anti-shake coil 141 can be electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12. In other embodiments, the electrical connection method of the first anti-shake coil 141 is not specifically limited. For example, the first anti-shake coil 141 can be directly electrically connected to the conductive part in the base 11 (not shown in the drawings). It can be understood that the conductive part can be formed in the base 11 by methods such as insert-molding.
示例性地,防抖驱动机构14还可以包括第一防抖传感器145。第一防抖传感器145可以固定连接并电连接于马达电路板12。第一防抖传感器145可以位于第一防抖线圈141的内侧。在其他的实施方式中,第一防抖传感器145的电连接方式不做具体的限定。For example, the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 may further include a first anti-shake sensor 145. The first anti-shake sensor 145 may be fixedly and electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12. The first anti-shake sensor 145 may be located inside the first anti-shake coil 141. In other embodiments, the electrical connection method of the first anti-shake sensor 145 is not specifically limited.
如图9所示,第二防抖线圈143可以固定连接于基座11。示例性地,第二防抖线圈143可以通过马达电路板12固定连接于底部111的第二边部1115(请参阅图7)。第二防抖线圈143可以电连接于马达电路板12。在其他的实施方式中,第二防抖线圈143的电连接方式不做具体的限定。As shown in Figure 9, the second anti-shake coil 143 can be fixedly connected to the base 11. For example, the second anti-shake coil 143 can be fixedly connected to the second edge 1115 of the bottom 111 via the motor circuit board 12 (see Figure 7). The second anti-shake coil 143 can be electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12. In other embodiments, the electrical connection method of the second anti-shake coil 143 is not specifically limited.
示例性地,防抖驱动机构14还可以包括第二防抖传感器146。第二防抖传感器146可以固定连接并电连接于马达电路板12。第二防抖传感器146可以位于第二防抖线圈143的内侧。在其他的实施方式中,第二防抖传感器146的电连接方式不做具体的限定。For example, the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 may further include a second anti-shake sensor 146. The second anti-shake sensor 146 may be fixedly and electrically connected to the motor circuit board 12. The second anti-shake sensor 146 may be located inside the second anti-shake coil 143. In other embodiments, the electrical connection method of the second anti-shake sensor 146 is not specifically limited.
图10是图5所示的导向支架15在一种实施方式的放大结构示意图。图11是图10所示的导向支架15在另一种角度的结构示意图。Figure 10 is an enlarged structural diagram of one embodiment of the guide bracket 15 shown in Figure 5. Figure 11 is a structural diagram of the guide bracket 15 shown in Figure 10 at another angle.
如图10和图11所示,示例性地,导向支架15可以大致呈“L”字形。As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 , illustratively, the guide bracket 15 may be substantially in an “L” shape.
示例性地,导向支架15可以包括多个导向块151和多个连接段152。导向块151的数量可以为三个, 连接段152的数量可以为两个。连接段152位于两个导向块151之间,两个连接段152可以呈夹角设置。For example, the guide bracket 15 may include a plurality of guide blocks 151 and a plurality of connecting sections 152. The number of the guide blocks 151 may be three. There may be two connecting sections 152. The connecting section 152 is located between the two guide blocks 151, and the two connecting sections 152 may be arranged at an angle.
示例性地,导向块151可以具有第一面1511和第二面1512。第一面1511和第二面1512可以背向设置。Illustratively, the guide block 151 may have a first surface 1511 and a second surface 1512. The first surface 1511 and the second surface 1512 may be arranged to face each other.
示例性地,导向块151可以包括多个第二凹槽1513和多个第三凹槽1514。在本实施方式中,第二凹槽1513和第三凹槽1514的数量可以均为三个。For example, the guide block 151 may include a plurality of second grooves 1513 and a plurality of third grooves 1514. In this embodiment, the number of the second grooves 1513 and the number of the third grooves 1514 may both be three.
示例性地,第二凹槽1513和第三凹槽1514可以背向设置。第二凹槽1513可以贯穿导向支架15的第一面1511。第三凹槽1514可以贯穿导向支架15的第二面1512。For example, the second groove 1513 and the third groove 1514 may be arranged in opposite directions. The second groove 1513 may pass through the first surface 1511 of the guide bracket 15 , and the third groove 1514 may pass through the second surface 1512 of the guide bracket 15 .
示例性地,至少一个第二凹槽1513的横截面可以大致呈“V”字形,至少一个第二凹槽1513的横截面可以大致呈“U”字形。第二凹槽1513的延伸方向可以与第二方向Y平行。For example, the cross section of at least one second groove 1513 may be substantially V-shaped, or the cross section of at least one second groove 1513 may be substantially U-shaped. The extension direction of the second groove 1513 may be parallel to the second direction Y.
示例性地,第三凹槽1514的横截面可以大致呈“U”字形。For example, the cross section of the third groove 1514 may be substantially U-shaped.
图12是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图三。图13是图12所示的马达1在B-B线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 12 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in Figure 5 in one embodiment. Figure 13 is a partial cross-sectional view of the motor 1 shown in Figure 12 at line B-B in one embodiment.
如图12和图13所示,导向支架15可以活动连接于基座11。示例性地,导向支架15的三个导向块151与基座11的三个第一凹槽113一一对应设置。导向支架15的三个第二凹槽1513与基座11的三个第一凹槽113一一对应设置,安装于第一凹槽113的第一连接件131可以部分嵌入第二凹槽1513中。此时,导向支架15通过多个第一连接件131活动连接于基座11。As shown in Figures 12 and 13, the guide bracket 15 can be movably connected to the base 11. For example, the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three first grooves 113 of the base 11. The three second grooves 1513 of the guide bracket 15 are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three first grooves 113 of the base 11. The first connecting members 131 installed in the first grooves 113 can be partially embedded in the second grooves 1513. In this case, the guide bracket 15 is movably connected to the base 11 via the multiple first connecting members 131.
示例性地,第一凹槽113可以对第一连接件131进行限位及导向,第一连接件131可以在第二凹槽1513内沿第二方向Y运动。因此,导向支架15也可以相对基座11沿平行于第二方向Y的方向滑动。在其他的实施方式中,通过改变第一凹槽113和第二凹槽1513的形状和大小,以使第一连接件131可以在第一凹槽113内沿第二方向Y运动,第二凹槽1513可以对第一连接件131进行限位及导向。For example, the first groove 113 can limit and guide the first connecting member 131, and the first connecting member 131 can move in the second direction Y within the second groove 1513. Therefore, the guide bracket 15 can also slide relative to the base 11 in a direction parallel to the second direction Y. In other embodiments, by changing the shape and size of the first groove 113 and the second groove 1513, the first connecting member 131 can move in the second direction Y within the first groove 113, and the second groove 1513 can limit and guide the first connecting member 131.
示例性地,导向支架15的三个第三凹槽1514可以与防抖支架16的三个第四凹槽164一一对应设置,安装于第三凹槽1514的第二连接件132可以部分嵌入第四凹槽164中。此时,防抖支架16可以通过多个第二连接件132活动连接于导向支架15。For example, the three third grooves 1514 of the guide bracket 15 can be arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16, and the second connecting members 132 installed in the third grooves 1514 can be partially embedded in the fourth grooves 164. In this case, the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the guide bracket 15 via the multiple second connecting members 132.
示例性地,第三凹槽1514可以对第二连接件132进行限位及导向,第二连接件132可以在第四凹槽164内沿第一方向X运动。因此,防抖支架16可以相对基座11沿平行于第一方向X的方向滑动。在其他的实施方式中,通过改变第三凹槽1514和第四凹槽164的形状和大小,以使第二连接件132可以在第三凹槽1514内沿第一方向X运动,第四凹槽164可以对第二连接件132进行限位及导向。For example, the third groove 1514 can limit and guide the second connecting member 132, and the second connecting member 132 can move within the fourth groove 164 along the first direction X. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket 16 can slide relative to the base 11 in a direction parallel to the first direction X. In other embodiments, by changing the shape and size of the third groove 1514 and the fourth groove 164, the second connecting member 132 can move within the third groove 1514 along the first direction X, and the fourth groove 164 can limit and guide the second connecting member 132.
可以理解的是,第二连接件132可以采用滚珠结构。在其他的实施方式中,第二连接件132也可以采用滑轴结构或者其他结构。本申请对第二连接件132的具体结构不作限定。It is understood that the second connecting member 132 can adopt a ball structure. In other embodiments, the second connecting member 132 can also adopt a sliding shaft structure or other structures. The present application does not limit the specific structure of the second connecting member 132.
图14是图5所示的防抖支架16在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图。图15是图14所示的防抖支架16在另一种角度的结构示意图。Fig. 14 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Fig. 5 in one embodiment. Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Fig. 14 at another angle.
如图14和图15所示,防抖支架16包括底板161、侧板162、第一凸块163a以及第二凸块163b。侧板162、第一凸块163a以及第二凸块163b均连接于底板161。侧板162、第一凸块163a以及第二凸块163b彼此间隔设置。As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a bottom plate 161, a side plate 162, a first bump 163a, and a second bump 163b. The side plate 162, the first bump 163a, and the second bump 163b are all connected to the bottom plate 161. The side plate 162, the first bump 163a, and the second bump 163b are spaced apart from each other.
示例性地,防抖支架16还可以包括安装孔16a。防抖支架16的安装孔16a可以沿第三方向Z贯穿防抖支架16的底板161。安装孔16a可以大致呈圆形。侧板162、第一凸块163a和第二凸块163b可以围绕防抖支架16的安装孔16a设置。For example, the anti-shake bracket 16 may further include a mounting hole 16a. The mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16 may extend through the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z. The mounting hole 16a may be generally circular. The side plate 162, the first protrusion 163a, and the second protrusion 163b may be disposed around the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16.
示例性地,安装孔16a的孔壁凸设有固定块161a。示例性地,固定块161a可以呈环状。固定块161a和防抖支架16的底板161之间可以呈台阶状。For example, a fixing block 161a is protruded from the wall of the mounting hole 16a. For example, the fixing block 161a can be ring-shaped. The fixing block 161a and the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 can be stepped.
示例性地,安装孔16a在防抖支架16的底板161上形成第一开口162a。Illustratively, the mounting hole 16 a forms a first opening 162 a on the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 .
示例性地,防抖支架16还可以包括第四凹槽164。第四凹槽164的数量可以与第二连接件132的数量相适配,第四凹槽164的数量可以为三个。第四凹槽164的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X。For example, the anti-shake bracket 16 may further include a fourth groove 164. The number of the fourth grooves 164 may match the number of the second connecting members 132, and the number of the fourth grooves 164 may be three. The extension direction of the fourth groove 164 may be parallel to the first direction X.
示例性地,防抖支架16包括第一安装槽165。第一安装槽165的数量可以为两个。第一安装槽165可以位于侧板162。两个第一安装槽165可以间隔设置。For example, the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a first mounting groove 165. There may be two first mounting grooves 165. The first mounting grooves 165 may be located on the side plate 162. The two first mounting grooves 165 may be spaced apart.
图16是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图四。FIG16 is a fourth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
如图16所示,第三连接件133可以安装于防抖支架16的第一安装槽165。示例性地,第三连接件133可以通过粘接等方式固定连接于防抖支架16。在其他的实施方式中,第三连接件133可以滑动连接于防抖支架16。As shown in FIG16 , the third connecting member 133 can be installed in the first mounting slot 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16. For example, the third connecting member 133 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means. In other embodiments, the third connecting member 133 can be slidably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16.
图17是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图五。 FIG17 is a fifth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
如图17所示,第一防抖磁性件142可以安装于防抖支架16。示例性地,第一防抖磁性件142可以通过粘接等方式固定于防抖支架16。其中,第一防抖磁性件142可以是磁石或者具有磁性的部件。示例性地,第一防抖磁性件142包括至少两个相反的极性方向。例如,第一防抖磁性件142可以包括三个沿第一方向X排布的磁石。可以理解的是,极性方向可以是北极(N)朝向南极(S)的方向,或者南极(S)朝向北极(N)的方向。As shown in Figure 17, the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be installed on the anti-shake bracket 16. For example, the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means. The first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can be a magnet or a component with magnetism. For example, the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 includes at least two opposite polarity directions. For example, the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 can include three magnets arranged along the first direction X. It can be understood that the polarity direction can be the direction of the North Pole (N) toward the South Pole (S), or the direction of the South Pole (S) toward the North Pole (N).
如图17所示,第二防抖磁性件144可以安装于防抖支架16。示例性地,第二防抖磁性件144可以通过粘接等方式固定于防抖支架16。其中,第二防抖磁性件144可以是磁石或者具有磁性的部件。示例性地,第二防抖磁性件144包括至少两个相反的极性方向。例如,第二防抖磁性件144可以包括三个沿第二方向Y排布的磁石。As shown in Figure 17, the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be mounted on the anti-shake bracket 16. For example, the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16 by bonding or other means. The second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can be a magnet or a magnetic component. For example, the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 includes at least two opposite polarity directions. For example, the second anti-shake magnetic component 144 can include three magnets arranged along the second direction Y.
图18是图4所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一。图19是图18所示的摄像模组100在C-C线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。图20是图18所示的摄像模组100在D-D线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 18 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 4 in one embodiment. Figure 19 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 18 at line C-C in one embodiment. Figure 20 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 18 at line D-D in one embodiment.
如图18至图20所示,防抖支架16可以通过导向支架15活动连接于基座11,防抖支架16可以位于导向支架15的远离基座11的一侧。其中,导向支架15的三个导向块151位于防抖支架16和基座11之间,导向支架15的第三凹槽1514对应防抖支架16的三个第四凹槽164设置,安装于第三凹槽1514的第二连接件132可以至少部分嵌入第四凹槽164中。此时,防抖支架16通过多个第二连接件132连接导向支架15的三个导向块151。As shown in Figures 18 to 20, the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the base 11 via the guide bracket 15. The anti-shake bracket 16 can be located on the side of the guide bracket 15 away from the base 11. Specifically, the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 are located between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11. The third grooves 1514 of the guide bracket 15 are corresponding to the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16. The second connectors 132 installed in the third grooves 1514 can be at least partially embedded in the fourth grooves 164. In this case, the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the three guide blocks 151 of the guide bracket 15 via the multiple second connectors 132.
可以理解的是,导向支架15能够保证防抖支架16和基座11的连接可靠性,能够实现稳定支撑和准确导向的作用,确保第一防抖线圈141与第一防抖磁性件142的相对位置及第二防抖线圈143与第二防抖磁性件144的相对位置的稳定性,马达1能够通过基座11、第一连接件131、导向支架15、第二连接件132及防抖支架16的配合结构,在光学防抖过程中实现精确导向,从而解决传统马达进行光学防抖时出现镜头倾斜过大的问题,使得摄像模组100的光学防抖运动平稳、可靠。It can be understood that the guide bracket 15 can ensure the connection reliability between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11, and can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guidance, ensuring the stability of the relative position of the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142 and the relative position of the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144. The motor 1 can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base 11, the first connecting part 131, the guide bracket 15, the second connecting part 132 and the anti-shake bracket 16, thereby solving the problem of excessive lens tilt when the traditional motor performs optical image stabilization, and making the optical image stabilization movement of the camera module 100 smooth and reliable.
示例性地,多个第一连接件131位于第一凹槽113内,多个第二连接件132位于延伸方向平行于第一方向X的第四凹槽164内,防抖支架16可以在垂直于第三方向Z(也即X-Y平面)上相对基座11运动,这样,防抖支架16与导向支架15的相对运动方向不同于导向支架15与基座的相对运动方向。Exemplarily, multiple first connecting members 131 are located in the first groove 113, and multiple second connecting members 132 are located in the fourth groove 164 whose extension direction is parallel to the first direction X. The anti-shake bracket 16 can move relative to the base 11 in a direction perpendicular to the third direction Z (i.e., the X-Y plane). In this way, the relative movement direction of the anti-shake bracket 16 and the guide bracket 15 is different from the relative movement direction of the guide bracket 15 and the base.
如图18至图20所示,第一镜头2可以与防抖支架16固定连接。As shown in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 , the first lens 2 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16 .
示例性地,第一镜头2可以位于防抖支架16的安装孔16a内,第一镜头2可以固定于固定块161a,且第一镜头2未伸出第一开口162a。在一种实施方式中,第一镜头2的一部分可以位于固定块161a的朝向基座11的一侧,且固定连接于固定块161a的朝向基座11的表面。在其他实施方式中,第一镜头2与防抖支架16的连接位置不做具体地限定。For example, the first lens 2 can be positioned within the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16. The first lens 2 can be fixed to the fixing block 161a, and the first lens 2 does not extend beyond the first opening 162a. In one embodiment, a portion of the first lens 2 can be positioned on a side of the fixing block 161a facing the base 11 and fixedly connected to the surface of the fixing block 161a facing the base 11. In other embodiments, the connection position of the first lens 2 and the anti-shake bracket 16 is not specifically limited.
可以理解的是,在第二镜头3进行对焦的过程中,由于第一镜头2未伸出第一开口162a,第一镜头2和第二镜头3之间不会产生碰撞,从而避免第一镜头2或者第二镜头3的损坏。It is understandable that during the focusing process of the second lens 3 , since the first lens 2 does not extend out of the first opening 162 a , no collision occurs between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 , thereby avoiding damage to the first lens 2 or the second lens 3 .
可以理解的是,第一镜头2通过与固定块161a固定连接,以实现与防抖支架16的固定连接,且与防抖支架16的连接更加可靠。It is understandable that the first lens 2 is fixedly connected to the fixing block 161 a to achieve a fixed connection with the anti-shake bracket 16 , and the connection with the anti-shake bracket 16 is more reliable.
示例性地,第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142排布于第三方向Z,第一防抖线圈141面向第一防抖磁性件142设置,用于驱动防抖支架16和第一镜头2相对基座11沿第一方向X运动。其中,第一防抖线圈141面向第一防抖磁性件142设置,是指第一防抖线圈141的绕线平面面向第一防抖磁性件142。例如,第一防抖线圈141的绕线平面可以平行于X-Y平面设置。For example, the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 are arranged in the third direction Z, with the first anti-shake coil 141 facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 142, to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 in the first direction X. The first anti-shake coil 141 facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 142 means that the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 141 faces the first anti-shake magnetic component 142. For example, the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 141 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
示例性地,第一防抖传感器145可以用于检测防抖支架16在第一方向X上的位置变化。For example, the first anti-shake sensor 145 may be used to detect a position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the first direction X.
示例性地,第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144排布于第三方向Z,第二防抖线圈143面向第二防抖磁性件144设置,用于驱动防抖支架16和第一镜头2相对基座11沿第二方向Y运动。其中,第二防抖线圈143面向第二防抖磁性件144设置,是指第二防抖线圈143的绕线平面面向第二防抖磁性件144。例如,第二防抖线圈143的绕线平面可以平行于X-Y平面设置。For example, the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic element 144 are arranged in the third direction Z, with the second anti-shake coil 143 facing the second anti-shake magnetic element 144, to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 in the second direction Y. The second anti-shake coil 143 facing the second anti-shake magnetic element 144 means that the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 143 faces the second anti-shake magnetic element 144. For example, the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 143 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
示例性地,第二防抖传感器146(请参阅图12)可以用于检测防抖支架16在第二方向Y上的位置变化。For example, the second anti-shake sensor 146 (see FIG. 12 ) may be used to detect a position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the second direction Y.
可以理解的是,第一防抖传感器145和第二防抖传感器146能够检测防抖支架16的位置变化,摄像模组100能够根据检测结果来调节防抖支架16的位置,从而达到更好的光学防抖效果。It is understandable that the first anti-shake sensor 145 and the second anti-shake sensor 146 can detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 16, and the camera module 100 can adjust the position of the anti-shake bracket 16 according to the detection results, so as to achieve a better optical anti-shake effect.
可以理解的是,在第一防抖线圈141、第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143以及第二防抖磁性件144的驱动下,防抖支架16能够带动第一镜头2,沿第一方向X和/或第二方向Y相对基座11运动,从而 实现第一镜头2在X-Y平面的运动。It can be understood that, driven by the first anti-shake coil 141, the first anti-shake magnetic member 142, the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144, the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, thereby Realize the movement of the first lens 2 in the XY plane.
可以理解的是,第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142驱动防抖支架16和第一镜头2运动的方向、与第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144驱动防抖支架16和第一镜头2运动的方向可以相互垂直。在其他一些实施方式中,第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142驱动防抖支架16运动的方向、与第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144驱动防抖支架16运动的方向也可以相交但不垂直。It is understood that the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move can be perpendicular to the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 to move. In other embodiments, the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move can intersect with the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move, but are not perpendicular to each other.
可以理解的是,在第一防抖线圈141、第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143以及第二防抖磁性件144的作用下,防抖支架16可以带动第一镜头2在垂直于第三方向Z(也即X-Y平面)上相对基座11运动。而基于第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144的两组驱动机构,防抖支架16和第一镜头2可以实现在X-Y平面上的大行程运动。It is understood that, under the action of the first anti-shake coil 141, the first anti-shake magnetic element 142, the second anti-shake coil 143, and the second anti-shake magnetic element 144, the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move perpendicular to the third direction Z (i.e., the X-Y plane) relative to the base 11. Furthermore, based on the two sets of drive mechanisms of the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic element 142, the second anti-shake coil 143, and the second anti-shake magnetic element 144, the anti-shake bracket 16 and the first lens 2 can achieve a large range of motion in the X-Y plane.
图21是图5所示的对焦电路板23在另一种角度的结构放大示意图。FIG21 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the focusing circuit board 23 shown in FIG5 at another angle.
如图21所示,示例性地,对焦电路板23可以大致呈有缺口的“口”字形。对焦电路板23的至少部分的外侧设有补强板。As shown in FIG21 , for example, the focusing circuit board 23 may be substantially in the shape of a Chinese character "口" with a notch. A reinforcing plate is provided on at least a portion of the outer side of the focusing circuit board 23 .
示例性地,对焦电路板23包括第一固定部分231和第二固定部分232。第一固定部分231和第二固定部分232可以位于缺口的两侧。Exemplarily, the focusing circuit board 23 includes a first fixing portion 231 and a second fixing portion 232. The first fixing portion 231 and the second fixing portion 232 may be located on both sides of the notch.
图22是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图六。FIG. 22 is a sixth diagram of a partial structural assembly of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 5 in one embodiment.
请参阅图22,并结合图14所示,示例性地,对焦电路板23可以固定于防抖支架16。示例性地,对焦电路板23的一部分固定于防抖支架16的侧板162,且位于防抖支架16的内侧。对焦电路板23的一部分还固定于防抖支架16的第一凸块163a和第二凸块163b。其中,对焦电路板23的一部分位于第一凸块163a与侧板162之间,一部分位于第一凸块163a和第二凸块163b之间,一部分位于第二凸块163b与侧板162之间。Referring to Figure 22 and in conjunction with Figure 14 , the focus circuit board 23 can be exemplarily fixed to the anti-shake bracket 16. Exemplarily, a portion of the focus circuit board 23 is fixed to the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 16. A portion of the focus circuit board 23 is also fixed to the first and second bumps 163a, 163b of the anti-shake bracket 16. Part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the first bump 163a and the side plate 162, part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the first and second bumps 163a, 163b, and part of the focus circuit board 23 is located between the second bump 163b and the side plate 162.
示例性地,对焦线圈221可以固定连接于对焦电路板23,且电连接于对焦电路板23。在一种实施方式中,对焦线圈221可以固定连接于对焦电路板23的第一固定部分231的远离防抖支架16的侧板162的一侧。For example, the focus coil 221 can be fixedly connected to the focus circuit board 23 and electrically connected to the focus circuit board 23. In one embodiment, the focus coil 221 can be fixedly connected to a side of the first fixing portion 231 of the focus circuit board 23 away from the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
示例性地,对焦驱动机构22还包括对焦传感器24。对焦传感器24可以固定连接于对焦电路板23,且电连接于对焦电路板23。在一种实施方式中,对焦传感器24可以固定连接于第一固定部分231的远离防抖支架16的侧板162的一侧,并位于对焦线圈221的内侧。Illustratively, the focus drive mechanism 22 further includes a focus sensor 24. The focus sensor 24 can be fixedly connected to the focus circuit board 23 and electrically connected to the focus circuit board 23. In one embodiment, the focus sensor 24 can be fixedly connected to a side of the first fixing portion 231 away from the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and located inside the focus coil 221.
图23是图5所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图七。FIG23 is a seventh partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG5 in one embodiment.
如图23所示,示例性地,对焦支架21可以大体呈框形,对焦支架21具有安装空间21a。As shown in FIG. 23 , illustratively, the focus bracket 21 may be substantially frame-shaped, and the focus bracket 21 has an installation space 21 a .
示例性地,对焦支架21包括多个第二安装槽211。Exemplarily, the focus bracket 21 includes a plurality of second mounting grooves 211 .
示例性地,第二安装槽211的数量可以为两个。两个第二安装槽211可以背向安装空间21a设置,并间隔设置。For example, there may be two second mounting grooves 211. The two second mounting grooves 211 may be disposed facing away from the mounting space 21a and spaced apart.
示例性地,对焦磁性件222可以固定连接于对焦支架21。示例性地,对焦磁性件222可以通过粘接等方式固定于对焦支架21。For example, the focus magnetic member 222 may be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21. For example, the focus magnetic member 222 may be fixed to the focus bracket 21 by bonding or the like.
示例性地,对焦磁性件222可以是磁石或者具有磁性的部件。在本实施方式中,对焦磁性件222包括两个沿第三方向Z排布的磁石。For example, the focusing magnetic member 222 may be a magnet or a component having magnetism. In this embodiment, the focusing magnetic member 222 includes two magnets arranged along the third direction Z.
图24是图4所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二。图25是图24所示的摄像模组100在E-E线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Fig. 24 is a second diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 4 in one embodiment. Fig. 25 is a partial cross-sectional view of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 24 at line E-E in one embodiment.
如图24和图25所示,对焦支架21可以滑动连接于防抖支架16。示例性地,防抖支架16的两个第一安装槽165与对焦支架21的两个第二安装槽211(请参阅图23)对应设置。其中,两个第三连接件133安装于防抖支架16的第一安装槽165,且至少部分嵌入对焦支架21的第二安装槽211中。防抖支架16和对焦支架21的相对滑动方向可以平行于第三方向Z。在其他的实施方式中,第三连接件133可以固定连接于对焦支架21的第二安装槽211,且至少部分嵌入防抖支架16的第一安装槽165内。As shown in Figures 24 and 25, the focus bracket 21 can be slidably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16. For example, the two first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 correspond to the two second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21 (see Figure 23). The two third connecting members 133 are mounted in the first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 and at least partially embedded in the second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21. The relative sliding direction between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 can be parallel to the third direction Z. In other embodiments, the third connecting members 133 can be fixedly connected to the second mounting slots 211 of the focus bracket 21 and at least partially embedded in the first mounting slots 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16.
示例性地,防抖支架16和对焦支架21之间设有缓冲件(附图中均未示出),能够减少防抖支架16和对焦支架21之间的碰撞,从而避免防抖支架16和对焦支架21的损坏。Illustratively, a buffer member (not shown in the drawings) is provided between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 to reduce collision between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 , thereby avoiding damage to the anti-shake bracket 16 and the focus bracket 21 .
如图25所示,示例性地,对焦线圈221可以和对焦磁性件222对应设置。As shown in FIG. 25 , illustratively, the focusing coil 221 may be arranged corresponding to the focusing magnetic member 222 .
示例性地,第二镜头3可以固定连接于对焦支架21。对焦支架21的安装空间21a可以用于安装第二镜头3。第二镜头3的至少部分可以位于对焦支架21的外部。For example, the second lens 3 may be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21. The installation space 21a of the focus bracket 21 may be used to install the second lens 3. At least a portion of the second lens 3 may be located outside the focus bracket 21.
示例性地,对焦支架21的安装空间21a可以与防抖支架16的安装孔16a相对设置。这样,第一镜头2的光轴可以与第二镜头3的光轴大致平行。 For example, the mounting space 21a of the focus bracket 21 may be arranged opposite to the mounting hole 16a of the anti-shake bracket 16. In this way, the optical axis of the first lens 2 may be substantially parallel to the optical axis of the second lens 3.
如图25所示,对焦线圈221固定于对焦电路板23,对焦磁性件222固定于对焦支架21,对焦线圈221面向对焦磁性件222设置,用于驱动对焦支架21相对防抖支架16沿第三方向Z运动。当对焦支架21相对防抖支架16沿第三方向Z运动时,对焦支架21可以带动安装于其上的第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动,此时,马达1可以实现摄像模组100的自动对焦。可以理解的是,对焦线圈221面向对焦磁性件222设置,是指对焦线圈221的绕线平面面向对焦磁性件222。As shown in Figure 25, the focus coil 221 is fixed to the focus circuit board 23, the focus magnetic part 222 is fixed to the focus bracket 21, and the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, and is used to drive the focus bracket 21 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z. When the focus bracket 21 moves relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z, the focus bracket 21 can drive the second lens 3 mounted thereon to move along the third direction Z. At this time, the motor 1 can realize automatic focus of the camera module 100. It can be understood that the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, which means that the winding plane of the focus coil 221 faces the focus magnetic part 222.
示例性地,对焦传感器24可以用于检测对焦支架21在第三方向Z上的位置变化。这样,摄像模组100可以根据对焦传感器24的检测结果来调节对焦支架21的位置,从而达到更好的对焦效果。For example, the focus sensor 24 can be used to detect the position change of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z. In this way, the camera module 100 can adjust the position of the focus bracket 21 according to the detection result of the focus sensor 24, thereby achieving a better focusing effect.
可以理解的是,对焦驱动机构22驱动对焦支架21沿第三方向Z运动,从而带动第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动,进而实现摄像模组100的自动对焦。其中,在第二镜头3进行自动对焦时,第一镜头2和第二镜头3之间在第三方向Z的相对距离会产生变化,而较小的距离变化就可以实现较大的焦距改变,有利于提高摄像模组100的对焦能力。可以理解的是,对焦行程较短的第二镜头3能够实现马达1在微距状态下的自动对焦,从而提高摄像模组100在微距状态下的成像质量。It is understandable that the focus drive mechanism 22 drives the focus bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, thereby driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, thereby achieving automatic focus of the camera module 100. Among them, when the second lens 3 performs automatic focus, the relative distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 in the third direction Z will change, and a smaller distance change can achieve a larger focal length change, which is beneficial to improving the focusing ability of the camera module 100. It is understandable that the second lens 3 with a shorter focusing stroke can achieve automatic focus of the motor 1 in the macro state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the macro state.
图26是图24所示的摄像模组100在F-F线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 26 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 24 at the F-F line.
如图25和图26所示,第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142对应设置,第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144对应设置,第一防抖线圈141和第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143和第二防抖磁性件144共同驱动防抖支架16沿X-Y平面运动,从而驱动第一镜头2沿X-Y平面运动,进而实现摄像模组100的光学防抖。As shown in Figures 25 and 26, the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142 are correspondingly arranged, and the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144 are correspondingly arranged. The first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic part 142, the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144 jointly drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move along the X-Y plane, thereby driving the first lens 2 to move along the X-Y plane, and then realizing optical image stabilization of the camera module 100.
可以理解的是,相较于防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c分开设置的分体式的马达1,防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c形成的一体式的马达1的体积更小,有利于摄像模组100的小型化设置,从而有利于节省电子设备1000的内部空间。此外,一体式的马达1相比起分体式马达减少了一个马达,能够降低摄像模组100的制造成本。It is understood that, compared to a separate motor 1 in which the anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c are provided separately, the integrated motor 1 formed by the anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c is smaller in size, facilitating a miniaturized design of the camera module 100, thereby conserving internal space within the electronic device 1000. Furthermore, the integrated motor 1 eliminates one motor compared to a separate motor, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the camera module 100.
可以理解的是,相较于通过防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c驱动同一个镜头实现光学防抖和自动对焦的方案,通过防抖模块1b驱动第一镜头2、对焦模块1c驱动第二镜头3实现光学防抖和自动对焦的方案,能够在摄像模组100进行对焦时,仅驱动第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动,而第一镜头2不需要沿第三方向Z运动。这样,摄像模组100的对焦行程即为第二镜头3沿其光轴方向运动的距离,相比起相同的成像质量的摄像模组100,本实施例的摄像模组100的对焦行程较短。It is understandable that, compared to the solution of achieving optical image stabilization and autofocus by having the anti-shake module 1b and the focus module 1c drive the same lens, the solution of achieving optical image stabilization and autofocus by having the anti-shake module 1b drive the first lens 2 and the focus module 1c drive the second lens 3 can, when the camera module 100 is focusing, only drive the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, while the first lens 2 does not need to move along the third direction Z. In this way, the focus stroke of the camera module 100 is the distance that the second lens 3 moves along its optical axis. Compared with camera modules 100 with the same imaging quality, the focus stroke of the camera module 100 of this embodiment is shorter.
可以理解的是,将摄像模组100的第一镜头2和第二镜头3分群设置,能够避免摄像模组100的防抖像旋问题,用户的对焦体验较佳。It is understandable that grouping the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 of the camera module 100 can avoid the anti-shake image rotation problem of the camera module 100, and the user's focusing experience is better.
可以理解的是,第一镜头2和第二镜头3的光轴方向可以均大致平行于电子设备1000的厚度方向,第一镜头2和第二镜头3的直径不受电子设备1000的厚度限制,不需要在电子设备1000的厚度方向上将透镜切割到特定的直径范围内,第一镜头2和第二镜头3在第二方向Y和第三方向Z上均对称,摄像模组100无成像ST分离及解析力差的问题。It can be understood that the optical axis directions of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be roughly parallel to the thickness direction of the electronic device 1000. The diameters of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 are not limited by the thickness of the electronic device 1000. There is no need to cut the lens into a specific diameter range in the thickness direction of the electronic device 1000. The first lens 2 and the second lens 3 are symmetrical in the second direction Y and the third direction Z. The camera module 100 does not have the problems of imaging ST separation and poor resolution.
图27是图4所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图三。FIG27 is a third diagram of a partial structural assembly of the camera module 100 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
如图27所示,示例性地,压件17可以固定于防抖支架16的背向基座11的一侧。可以理解的是,压件17可以与防抖支架16配合,限制对焦支架21在第三方向Z上的运动行程,以防止对焦支架21在对焦过程中脱离防抖支架16。As shown in FIG27 , for example, the pressing member 17 can be fixed to the side of the anti-shake bracket 16 that faces away from the base 11. It will be appreciated that the pressing member 17 can cooperate with the anti-shake bracket 16 to limit the movement of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z, thereby preventing the focus bracket 21 from separating from the anti-shake bracket 16 during the focusing process.
图28是图5所示的外壳18在另一种角度的结构放大示意图。FIG28 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the housing 18 shown in FIG5 at another angle.
如图28所示,示例性地,外壳18可以大致呈方形盖状。As shown in FIG. 28 , the housing 18 may be exemplarily in the shape of a substantially square cover.
示例性地,外壳18设有通孔181,马达1的部分结构可以经通孔181露出。Exemplarily, the housing 18 is provided with a through hole 181 , through which a portion of the structure of the motor 1 can be exposed.
示例性地,外壳18设有缓冲件182,缓冲件182位于外壳18的内部,并位于通孔181的一侧。Exemplarily, the housing 18 is provided with a buffer member 182 , which is located inside the housing 18 and on one side of the through hole 181 .
图29是图3所示的摄像模组100在G-G线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 29 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the G-G line.
如图28和图29所示,示例性地,外壳18可以与基座11的形状相适配,外壳18可以罩设在基座11上。外壳18可以通过胶粘等方式与基座11固定连接。外壳18可以与基座11组装配合,共同封装和保护马达1的内部结构。As shown in Figures 28 and 29, for example, the housing 18 can be adapted to the shape of the base 11 and can be mounted on the base 11. The housing 18 can be fixedly connected to the base 11 by gluing or other methods. The housing 18 can be assembled with the base 11 to jointly encapsulate and protect the internal structure of the motor 1.
示例性地,对焦支架21以及第二镜头3的部分结构可以经外壳18的通孔181露出。Exemplarily, the focus bracket 21 and a portion of the structure of the second lens 3 may be exposed through the through hole 181 of the housing 18 .
示例性地,缓冲件182可以与压件17间隔设置。可以理解的是,缓冲件182能够防止压件17与外壳18之间的碰撞。Exemplarily, the buffer member 182 can be spaced apart from the pressing member 17 . It can be understood that the buffer member 182 can prevent the collision between the pressing member 17 and the housing 18 .
图30是图4所示的棱镜组件4在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。FIG30 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
如图30所示,棱镜组件4包括棱镜41、棱镜支架42和遮光片43。 As shown in FIG30 , the prism assembly 4 includes a prism 41 , a prism bracket 42 and a light shielding sheet 43 .
示例性地,棱镜41的横截面可以大致呈船形。在其他的实施方式中,棱镜41的横截面可以为三角形、平行四边形或者不规则形等。具体地本申请不做限定。For example, the cross section of the prism 41 may be approximately boat-shaped. In other embodiments, the cross section of the prism 41 may be triangular, parallelogram, or irregular, etc. This application does not limit this in detail.
示例性地,棱镜41可以包括第一表面411、第二表面412、第一侧面413以及第二侧面414。第一表面411和第二表面412可以大致平行。第一侧面413和第二侧面414可以呈夹角设置。第一表面411、第一侧面413、第二表面412以及第二侧面414可以依次首尾连接。此时,第一侧面413与第二侧面414可以分别位于第一表面411的两侧。For example, the prism 41 may include a first surface 411, a second surface 412, a first side surface 413, and a second side surface 414. The first surface 411 and the second surface 412 may be substantially parallel. The first side surface 413 and the second side surface 414 may be arranged at an angle. The first surface 411, the first side surface 413, the second surface 412, and the second side surface 414 may be connected end to end in sequence. In this case, the first side surface 413 and the second side surface 414 may be located on either side of the first surface 411.
图31是图30所示的棱镜组件4在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图。FIG31 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG30 in one embodiment.
如图31所示,遮光片43可以固定于棱镜41的第一表面411。示例性地,遮光片43可以由塑料、金属或者复合材料等具有遮光性能的材料构成。As shown in Fig. 31, the light shielding sheet 43 may be fixed to the first surface 411 of the prism 41. For example, the light shielding sheet 43 may be made of a material having light shielding properties, such as plastic, metal, or a composite material.
可以理解的是,遮光片43将第一表面411分隔,从而形成间隔设置的入射面S7与出射面S11。也即,遮光片43可以位于棱镜41的入射面S7和出射面S11之间,防止光线自入射面S7和出射面S11之间的部分提前射出棱镜41。It is understood that the light shielding sheet 43 separates the first surface 411, thereby forming an incident surface S7 and an exit surface S11 that are spaced apart. In other words, the light shielding sheet 43 can be located between the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 to prevent light from prematurely exiting the prism 41 from the portion between the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11.
可以理解的是,本实施方式的棱镜41的入射面S7和出射面S11均位于棱镜41的第一表面411,也即入射面S7和出射面S11位于棱镜组件4的同一侧。在其他的实施方式中,棱镜41的入射面S7和出射面S11可以一者位于棱镜41的第一表面411,另一者位于棱镜41的第二表面412、第一侧面413以及第二侧面414之间的任意一个。It is understood that the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 in this embodiment are both located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, that is, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 are located on the same side of the prism assembly 4. In other embodiments, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, and the other may be located on any one of the second surface 412, the first side surface 413, and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41.
图32是图30所示的棱镜支架42在另一种角度的结构放大示意图。FIG32 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket 42 shown in FIG30 at another angle.
如图30和图32所示,示例性地,棱镜支架42包括第一安装部421和第二安装部422。第二安装部422凸设于第一安装部421的一端。可以理解的是,本实施方式中虽然将棱镜支架42分为两个部分进行介绍,但不影响棱镜支架42可以为一体成型结构,也即第一安装部421与第二安装部422可以一体成型。在其他的实施方式中,棱镜支架42的第二安装部422可以通过胶粘、焊接等方式和第一安装部421固定连接。As shown in Figures 30 and 32, illustratively, the prism bracket 42 includes a first mounting portion 421 and a second mounting portion 422. The second mounting portion 422 is protruding from one end of the first mounting portion 421. It will be understood that although the prism bracket 42 is described as two parts in this embodiment, this does not affect the prism bracket 42 being a one-piece structure, that is, the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 can be formed in one piece. In other embodiments, the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 can be fixedly connected to the first mounting portion 421 by gluing, welding, or the like.
示例性地,第一安装部421和第二安装部422所围成的空间可以构成棱镜支架42的容置空间423。容置空间423与棱镜支架42的外部连通。For example, the space enclosed by the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 may constitute an accommodating space 423 of the prism holder 42 . The accommodating space 423 is in communication with the outside of the prism holder 42 .
示例性地,棱镜支架42的容置空间423可以包括第一支撑面4231和第二支撑面4232。第一支撑面4231和第二支撑面4232之间可以呈夹角设置。For example, the accommodating space 423 of the prism bracket 42 may include a first supporting surface 4231 and a second supporting surface 4232. The first supporting surface 4231 and the second supporting surface 4232 may be arranged at an angle therebetween.
图33是图3所示的摄像模组100在H-H线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图一。Figure 33 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram 1 of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the H-H line.
如图33所示,棱镜41可以固定连接于棱镜支架42。棱镜41位于棱镜支架42的容置空间423内。示例性地,棱镜41的第一表面411可以大致与棱镜支架42的第二安装部422的顶部齐平。As shown in FIG33 , the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42. The prism 41 is located in the accommodation space 423 of the prism bracket 42. For example, the first surface 411 of the prism 41 can be substantially flush with the top of the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42.
示例性地,棱镜41的第一侧面413可以与容置空间423的第一支撑面4231大致平行,且棱镜41的第一侧面413可以与容置空间423的第一支撑面4231间隔设置。棱镜41的第二侧面414可以与容置空间423的第二支撑面4232大致平行,且棱镜41的第二侧面414可以与容置空间423的第二支撑面4232间隔设置。For example, the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423, and the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423. The second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423, and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423.
示例性地,棱镜组件4可以与马达1固定连接。示例性地,棱镜组件4的一部分可以自基座11的底部111的通光孔1116和侧部112的避让孔1121伸入马达1的避让空间1a内。For example, the prism assembly 4 can be fixedly connected to the motor 1. For example, a portion of the prism assembly 4 can extend from the light-through hole 1116 of the bottom 111 of the base 11 and the avoidance hole 1121 of the side 112 into the avoidance space 1a of the motor 1.
示例性地,马达1的基座11的一部分可以固定连接于棱镜组件4的遮光片43。棱镜组件4的棱镜支架42可以固定连接于基座11的远离防抖支架16的一侧。For example, a portion of the base 11 of the motor 1 may be fixedly connected to the light shielding sheet 43 of the prism assembly 4. The prism bracket 42 of the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to a side of the base 11 away from the anti-shake bracket 16.
示例性地,棱镜41的入射面S7可以面向第一镜头2和第二镜头3设置。Exemplarily, the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 may be disposed facing the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 .
示例性地,棱镜41的出射面S11位于马达1的外部,且位于棱镜41的朝向马达1的一侧。Exemplarily, the emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is located outside the motor 1 , and is located on the side of the prism 41 facing the motor 1 .
可以理解的是,前文结合相关附图具体介绍了一种棱镜组件4。在其他实施方式中,棱镜组件4的结构不做具体地限定。It is understood that the above text specifically introduces a prism assembly 4 in conjunction with the relevant drawings. In other embodiments, the structure of the prism assembly 4 is not specifically limited.
图34是图4所示的图像传感器组件5在一种实施方式的分解示意图。FIG34 is a schematic exploded view of the image sensor assembly 5 shown in FIG4 in one embodiment.
如图34所示,图像传感器组件5包括图像传感器51、滤光片52、滤光片支架53以及电路板54。As shown in FIG. 34 , the image sensor assembly 5 includes an image sensor 51 , a filter 52 , a filter holder 53 and a circuit board 54 .
示例性地,电路板54包括第一板部541、第二板部542以及第三板部543。第二板部542连接第一板部541和第三板部543。第一板部541和第三板部543相对且间隔设置。Exemplarily, the circuit board 54 includes a first board portion 541, a second board portion 542, and a third board portion 543. The second board portion 542 connects the first board portion 541 and the third board portion 543. The first board portion 541 and the third board portion 543 are opposite to each other and spaced apart.
图35是图4所示的图像传感器组件5在I-I线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。FIG35 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly 5 shown in FIG4 at line I-I.
如图35所示,示例性地,图像传感器51可以固定于电路板54的第一板部541的朝向第三板部543的一侧,且电连接于电路板54。此时,图像传感器51与电路板54之间可以相互传输信号。在其他实施方式中,图像传感器51固定于电路板54的位置不做具体地限定。 As shown in FIG35 , the image sensor 51 can be fixed to a side of the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54 that faces the third plate portion 543, and can be electrically connected to the circuit board 54. In this case, signals can be transmitted between the image sensor 51 and the circuit board 54. In other embodiments, the position where the image sensor 51 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
示例性地,滤光片支架53可以固定于电路板54的第一板部541。滤光片支架53与图像传感器51可以位于电路板54的第一板部541的同一侧。滤光片支架53设有贯穿孔531。在其他实施方式中,滤光片支架53固定于电路板54的位置不做具体地限定。For example, the filter holder 53 can be fixed to the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54. The filter holder 53 and the image sensor 51 can be located on the same side of the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54. The filter holder 53 is provided with a through hole 531. In other embodiments, the position where the filter holder 53 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
示例性地,滤光片52固定连接于滤光片支架53。滤光片52可以位于贯穿孔531内。滤光片52还与图像传感器51相对设置。滤光片52可以用于过滤进入图像传感器51之前的光线中的红外光或者蓝光等,从而保证图像传感器51具有较佳的成像质量。Illustratively, the filter 52 is fixedly connected to the filter holder 53. The filter 52 can be located within the through-hole 531. The filter 52 is also disposed opposite the image sensor 51. The filter 52 can be used to filter infrared light or blue light from light before entering the image sensor 51, thereby ensuring that the image sensor 51 has better imaging quality.
图36是图3所示的摄像模组100在H-H线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图二。Figure 36 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the H-H line.
如图36所示,棱镜组件4固定于电路板54的第三板部543,且一部分位于第一板部541与第三板部543之间。As shown in FIG. 36 , the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the third plate portion 543 of the circuit board 54 , and a portion of the prism assembly 4 is located between the first plate portion 541 and the third plate portion 543 .
示例性地,棱镜支架42的第一安装部421可以固定于第三板部543。棱镜41的出射面S11与滤光片52相对设置。For example, the first mounting portion 421 of the prism bracket 42 may be fixed to the third plate portion 543. The emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is disposed opposite to the filter 52.
在其他实施方式中,棱镜组件4固定于电路板54的位置不做具体地限定。In other embodiments, the position where the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the circuit board 54 is not specifically limited.
示例性地,光线自第二镜头3进入摄像模组100的内部,再依次经过第一镜头2和棱镜41的入射面S7后进入棱镜41的内部。在进入棱镜41之后,光线可以依次在棱镜41的第一侧面413的一部分、第一表面411的一部分以及第二侧面414的一部分上进行反射,经过至少三次反射后的光线可以由棱镜41的出射面S11射出棱镜41,并通过滤光片52后到达图像传感器51,图像传感器51将光线所携带的图像信息转化为电信号,从而实现成像。For example, light enters the interior of the camera module 100 from the second lens 3, then passes through the first lens 2 and the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 in sequence before entering the interior of the prism 41. After entering the prism 41, the light can be reflected in sequence on a portion of the first side surface 413, a portion of the first surface 411, and a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41. After at least three reflections, the light can be emitted from the prism 41 through the exit surface S11 of the prism 41, pass through the filter 52, and reach the image sensor 51. The image sensor 51 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal, thereby achieving imaging.
可以理解的是,在进入棱镜41之后,光线能够在棱镜41的内部发生至少三次折转。这样,摄像模组100的光路行程较大,能够实现在长焦状态时的拍摄,从而提高摄像模组100在长焦状态下的成像质量。在其他的实施方式中,光线能够在棱镜41的内部发生两次折转,此时,棱镜41的出射面S11可以为棱镜41的第二侧面414的一部分,图像传感器组件5的图像传感器51可以面向第二侧面414设置。It is understood that after entering the prism 41, the light can be refracted at least three times inside the prism 41. In this way, the optical path of the camera module 100 is relatively long, enabling shooting in a telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the telephoto state. In other embodiments, the light can be refracted twice inside the prism 41. In this case, the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 can be part of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41, and the image sensor 51 of the image sensor assembly 5 can be arranged facing the second side surface 414.
可以理解的是,在一种实施方式中,通过防抖模块1b驱动第一镜头2和第二镜头3在X-Y平面上运动实现光学防抖,通过对焦模块1c驱动第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动实现自动对焦,且防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c为一体式的结构,马达1的结构较简单、体积较小、制造成本较低。It can be understood that, in one embodiment, optical image stabilization is achieved by driving the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move in the X-Y plane through the anti-shake module 1b, and automatic focus is achieved by driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z through the focusing module 1c, and the anti-shake module 1b and the focusing module 1c are an integrated structure, the motor 1 has a simpler structure, a smaller size, and a lower manufacturing cost.
可以理解的是,当摄像模组100切换至长焦状态下的拍摄时,对焦模块1c可以驱动第二镜头3在第三方向Z上向摄像模组100的像侧移动,改变摄像模组100的焦距,能够实现摄像模组100在长焦状态下的对焦以及拍摄。此外,通过设置马达1与棱镜组件4固定连接、棱镜41的入射面S7面向第一镜头2和第二镜头3,通过设置图像传感器组件5与棱镜组件4固定连接、棱镜41的出射面S11面向图像传感器51,光线在棱镜41内的反射光路较长,满足摄像模组100的长焦特性,提高摄像模组100的长焦拍摄性能。It is understandable that when the camera module 100 switches to shooting in the telephoto state, the focus module 1c can drive the second lens 3 to move toward the image side of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z, thereby changing the focal length of the camera module 100 and enabling the camera module 100 to focus and shoot in the telephoto state. In addition, by setting the motor 1 to be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4, with the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 facing the first lens 2 and the second lens 3, and by setting the image sensor assembly 5 to be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4, with the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 facing the image sensor 51, the reflected light path of the light in the prism 41 is longer, thereby satisfying the telephoto characteristics of the camera module 100 and improving the telephoto shooting performance of the camera module 100.
可以理解的是,当摄像模组100切换至微距状态下的拍摄时,对焦模块1c可以驱动第二镜头3在第三方向Z上向摄像模组100的物侧移动,改变摄像模组100的焦距,就能够实现摄像模组100在微距状态下的对焦以及拍摄。It can be understood that when the camera module 100 switches to shooting in the macro state, the focusing module 1c can drive the second lens 3 to move toward the object side of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z, thereby changing the focal length of the camera module 100, thereby enabling the camera module 100 to focus and shoot in the macro state.
可以理解的是,在摄像模组100工作时,第一镜头2在第三方向Z上保持不动,第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动实现对焦,摄像模组100的结构设置较合理,这样,第二镜头3的沿第三方向Z的运动距离即为摄像模组100的对焦行程。由于第二镜头3的运动距离较小,摄像模组100的对焦行程也较小,摄像模组100在第三方向Z上的空间需求也较小,能够实现摄像模组100的小型化设置和电子设备1000的薄型化设置。It is understandable that when the camera module 100 is in operation, the first lens 2 remains stationary in the third direction Z, while the second lens 3 moves along the third direction Z to achieve focusing. The structural arrangement of the camera module 100 is relatively reasonable, such that the movement distance of the second lens 3 along the third direction Z is the focusing stroke of the camera module 100. Since the movement distance of the second lens 3 is relatively short, the focusing stroke of the camera module 100 is also relatively short, and the space requirement of the camera module 100 in the third direction Z is also relatively small, thereby enabling a miniaturized arrangement of the camera module 100 and a thinner arrangement of the electronic device 1000.
上文具体介绍了摄像模组100的相关部件的结构。下文将结合附图具体介绍摄像模组100的结构以及相关光学参数的设置。The above specifically introduces the structure of the relevant components of the camera module 100. The following will specifically introduce the structure of the camera module 100 and the setting of relevant optical parameters in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
示例性地,第一镜头2和第二镜头3可以具有相反的光焦度。示例性地,第一镜头2可以具有正光焦度,第二镜头3可以具有负光焦度,或者,第一镜头2可以具有负光焦度,第二镜头3可以具有正光焦度。可以理解的是,通过合理配置第一镜头2和第二镜头3的光焦度、设置第一镜头2和第二镜头3具有相反的光焦度,有利于实现对焦和微距对焦,减小对焦行程,提升对焦能力,且有利于提升摄像模组100在近景成像时画面的整体像质,增大系统的进光量,促进微距成像,并且能够平衡远景拍摄和近景拍摄的成像质量的差异,拍摄不同距离的物体时均具有良好的画质,且成像清晰度高。Exemplarily, the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 may have opposite optical powers. Exemplarily, the first lens 2 may have positive optical power, and the second lens 3 may have negative optical power, or the first lens 2 may have negative optical power, and the second lens 3 may have positive optical power. It can be understood that by reasonably configuring the optical powers of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 and setting the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to have opposite optical powers, it is beneficial to achieve focusing and macro focusing, reduce the focusing stroke, improve the focusing ability, and help improve the overall image quality of the camera module 100 when imaging in close-up, increase the amount of light entering the system, promote macro imaging, and balance the difference in imaging quality between long-range shooting and close-up shooting, so that objects at different distances have good image quality and high imaging clarity.
可以理解的是,当第一镜头2具有负光焦度、第二镜头3具有正光焦度时,第二镜头3可以用于光束汇聚,使得进入第一镜头2的光束的直径较小,第一镜头2的口径不再成为通光孔径的最大限制,有利于摄像模组100的小型化和大光圈设计,有效增加通光孔径,实现较小的光圈数,且能够增强对焦能力,有 利于实现微距拍摄。It can be understood that when the first lens 2 has a negative optical power and the second lens 3 has a positive optical power, the second lens 3 can be used to converge the light beam, so that the diameter of the light beam entering the first lens 2 is smaller, and the aperture of the first lens 2 is no longer the maximum limit of the light aperture, which is conducive to the miniaturization and large aperture design of the camera module 100, effectively increasing the light aperture, achieving a smaller aperture number, and enhancing the focusing ability. It is conducive to macro shooting.
在一种实施方式中,第一镜头2可以包括至少一片透镜,第二镜头3可以包括至少一片透镜,且第一镜头2可以包括至少一片具有负光焦度的透镜。示例性地,第二镜头3包括第一透镜L1和第二透镜L2,第一镜头2包括第三透镜L3,第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3可以依次自物侧至像侧排列,第一透镜L1可以具有正光焦度,第二透镜L2可以具有负光焦度,第三透镜L3可以具有负光焦度。可以理解的是,合理配置第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3的光焦度,有利于实现摄像模组100的小型化、大光圈和长焦等特征,有利于摄像模组100从远景到近景的对焦过程的实现以及提升摄像模组100的成像质量。In one embodiment, the first lens 2 may include at least one lens, the second lens 3 may include at least one lens, and the first lens 2 may include at least one lens with negative optical focal length. For example, the second lens 3 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2, and the first lens 2 includes a third lens L3. The first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 may be arranged in sequence from the object side to the image side. The first lens L1 may have positive optical focal length, the second lens L2 may have negative optical focal length, and the third lens L3 may have negative optical focal length. It can be understood that a reasonable configuration of the optical focal lengths of the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 is conducive to achieving the miniaturization, large aperture, and telephoto features of the camera module 100, and is conducive to the realization of the focusing process of the camera module 100 from the distant view to the near view and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
示例性地,第二镜头3可以包括至少一片阿贝数小于40的透镜。例如,第二镜头3的透镜的阿贝数的值可以等于5、10、22、38或者39等。可以理解的是,第二镜头3可以包括至少一片具有高色散的透镜,通过限定第二镜头3内至少一片透镜的阿贝数小于40,有利于减少摄像模组100中的色差,使得摄像模组100具有良好的成像质量。Exemplarily, the second lens 3 may include at least one lens having an Abbe number less than 40. For example, the Abbe number of the lens of the second lens 3 may be 5, 10, 22, 38, or 39. It is understood that the second lens 3 may include at least one lens with high dispersion. By limiting the Abbe number of at least one lens in the second lens 3 to less than 40, chromatic aberration in the camera module 100 is reduced, thereby ensuring that the camera module 100 has good imaging quality.
示例性地,第二镜头3可以包括具有正光焦度的透镜,且焦距最小的透镜的材质为可以玻璃。通过设置第二镜头3中焦距最小的具有正光焦度的透镜为玻璃材质,有利于减小摄像模组100的尺寸,实现摄像模组100的小型化,且有利于降低温漂系数,减小温漂效应,提高摄像模组100的成像质量。For example, the second lens 3 may include a lens with positive optical power, and the lens with the smallest focal length may be made of glass. By making the lens with the smallest focal length and positive optical power in the second lens 3 glass, the size of the camera module 100 can be reduced, miniaturizing the camera module 100, reducing the temperature drift coefficient, minimizing the temperature drift effect, and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
示例性地,第一镜头2中的透镜的阿贝数与棱镜组件4的棱镜41的阿贝数不同,有利于校正物距为无穷远至微距下的色差,从而有利于提高摄像模组100的成像质量。For example, the Abbe number of the lens in the first lens 2 is different from the Abbe number of the prism 41 of the prism assembly 4, which is beneficial for correcting chromatic aberration at object distances from infinity to macro, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:f1/EFL>-1,其中,f1为第一镜头2的焦距,EFL为摄像模组100的有效焦距。例如,f1/EFL的值可以等于-0.999、-0.88、-0.7、0.56、-0.3或者-0.1等。在其他的实施方式中,f1/EFL的值也可以满足其他范围。可以理解的是,通过合理限定f1/EFL的范围,有利于降低光圈数,实现大光圈的设计,提高摄像模组100的通光口径,确保摄像模组100的良好的成像质量。Exemplarily, the camera module 100 can satisfy: f1/EFL>-1, wherein f1 is the focal length of the first lens 2, and EFL is the effective focal length of the camera module 100. For example, the value of f1/EFL can be equal to -0.999, -0.88, -0.7, 0.56, -0.3 or -0.1, etc. In other embodiments, the value of f1/EFL can also satisfy other ranges. It is understandable that by reasonably limiting the range of f1/EFL, it is beneficial to reduce the aperture number, realize the design of a large aperture, improve the light-clearance diameter of the camera module 100, and ensure the good imaging quality of the camera module 100.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:f2/EFL≤0.9,其中,f2为第二镜头3的焦距。例如,f2/EFL的值可以等于0.001、0.11、0.23、0.38、0.45、0.5、0.66、0.75、0.88或者0.9等。在其他的实施方式中,f2/EFL的值也可以满足其他范围。可以理解的是,通过限定f2/EFL的范围,使得摄像模组100能够在较小的组装敏感度下,平衡摄像模组100远景拍摄和近景拍摄的像质差异,获得更均匀的像质。Exemplarily, the camera module 100 can satisfy: f2/EFL≤0.9, where f2 is the focal length of the second lens 3. For example, the value of f2/EFL can be equal to 0.001, 0.11, 0.23, 0.38, 0.45, 0.5, 0.66, 0.75, 0.88 or 0.9, etc. In other embodiments, the value of f2/EFL can also satisfy other ranges. It is understandable that by limiting the range of f2/EFL, the camera module 100 can balance the image quality difference between the long-range shooting and the close-up shooting of the camera module 100 under a smaller assembly sensitivity, thereby obtaining a more uniform image quality.
可以理解的是,通过合理限定f1/EFL和f2/EFL的范围,能够合理配制第一镜头2和第二镜头3的光焦度,有利于缩短摄像模组100的对焦行程、提高摄像模组100的对焦能力、实现摄像模组100在微距状态下的拍摄,在拍摄不同距离的物体时有良好的画质、成像清晰度高。It can be understood that by reasonably limiting the range of f1/EFL and f2/EFL, the optical focal length of the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be reasonably configured, which is beneficial to shortening the focusing stroke of the camera module 100, improving the focusing ability of the camera module 100, and realizing the shooting of the camera module 100 in a macro state, and having good image quality and high imaging clarity when shooting objects at different distances.
示例性地,第二镜头3包括至少一片具有正光焦度的透镜,第二镜头3中至少一片具有正光焦度的透镜的焦距与摄像模组100的有效焦距EFL的比值小于1。可以理解的是,通过设置第二镜头3中至少一片具有正光焦度的透镜的焦距与摄像模组100的有效焦距EFL的比值小于1,可以保证第二镜头3设置较少数量的镜片也能够为摄像模组100提供足够的光焦度,可以减少第二镜头3的尺寸,有利于实现微距拍摄,也有利于摄像模组100的长焦和小型化设计。Exemplarily, the second lens 3 includes at least one lens with positive optical power, and the ratio of the focal length of the at least one lens with positive optical power in the second lens 3 to the effective focal length EFL of the camera module 100 is less than 1. It can be understood that by setting the ratio of the focal length of the at least one lens with positive optical power in the second lens 3 to the effective focal length EFL of the camera module 100 to be less than 1, it can be ensured that the second lens 3 is provided with a smaller number of lenses and can also provide sufficient optical power for the camera module 100, which can reduce the size of the second lens 3, which is conducive to macro shooting and is also conducive to the telephoto and miniaturized design of the camera module 100.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:FOV<50°,其中,FOV为摄像模组100的视场角。例如,FOV的值可以等于49.9、30、23、18、10、8、5.3、3.8或者0.6等。可以理解的是,通过设置摄像模组100的视场角,使得摄像模组100具有长焦特性。For example, the camera module 100 can satisfy the following requirement: FOV < 50°, where FOV is the field of view of the camera module 100. For example, the FOV value can be 49.9, 30, 23, 18, 10, 8, 5.3, 3.8, or 0.6. It is understood that by setting the field of view of the camera module 100, the camera module 100 has a telephoto characteristic.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:IH>2mm,其中,IH为摄像模组100的最大像高。例如,IH的值可以等于2.01、2.38、3.54、4.36、6.66或者8.88等。可以理解的是,通过合理限定IH的范围使得摄像模组100具有大靶面的特性,且有利于实现较高的成像放大倍率,提高摄像模组100的解析力。For example, the camera module 100 can satisfy the following requirement: IH > 2 mm, where IH is the maximum image height of the camera module 100. For example, the value of IH can be 2.01, 2.38, 3.54, 4.36, 6.66, or 8.88. It is understood that by reasonably limiting the range of IH, the camera module 100 can have a large target surface, which is conducive to achieving a higher imaging magnification and improving the resolution of the camera module 100.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:L/IH>2,其中,L为光线在棱镜组件4的棱镜41内多次折转的总光路长度。例如,L/IH的值可以等于2.1、3.8、4.5、5.87、6.66或者8.88等数值。可以理解的是,光线在棱镜41中的总光路长度L大于像高IH的两倍,有利于对光线进行多次折叠、增大光程,有利于实现摄像模组100的长焦特性以及小型化设置。Exemplarily, the camera module 100 may satisfy the following condition: L/IH>2, where L is the total optical path length of the light after multiple folds within the prism 41 of the prism assembly 4. For example, the value of L/IH may be 2.1, 3.8, 4.5, 5.87, 6.66, or 8.88. It is understood that the total optical path length L of the light within the prism 41 is greater than twice the image height IH, which facilitates multiple folding of the light and increases the optical path length, thereby facilitating the realization of the telephoto characteristics and miniaturization of the camera module 100.
示例性地,摄像模组100可以满足:Fno<3.6,其中,Fno为摄像模组100的光圈数。例如,Fno的值可以等于0.5、0.99、1.53、1.66、2.38、2.66、3.02或者3.59等。可以理解的是,摄像模组100的Fno的数值越小,摄像模组100的光圈越大;摄像模组100的Fno的数值越大,摄像模组100的光圈越小。通过限定摄像模组100的Fno的数值,摄像模组100具有大光圈的特征。Exemplarily, the camera module 100 may satisfy: Fno < 3.6, where Fno is the aperture number of the camera module 100. For example, the value of Fno may be equal to 0.5, 0.99, 1.53, 1.66, 2.38, 2.66, 3.02, or 3.59, etc. It is understandable that the smaller the value of Fno of the camera module 100, the larger the aperture of the camera module 100; and the larger the value of Fno of the camera module 100, the smaller the aperture of the camera module 100. By limiting the value of Fno of the camera module 100, the camera module 100 has the characteristic of a large aperture.
下面将通过两个实施例结合相关附图,更加详细地描述本申请的一些具体的而非限制性的例子。The following will describe some specific but non-limiting examples of the present application in more detail through two embodiments in combination with relevant drawings.
第一种实施例:请参阅图37和图38,图37是本申请第一种实施例提供的摄像模组100在物距为无穷 远时的远景工作状态时的结构示意图。图38是图37所示的摄像模组100在微距拍摄时的近景工作状态时的结构示意图。First embodiment: Please refer to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37 is a first embodiment of the present application of the camera module 100 provided at an infinite object distance. FIG38 is a structural diagram of the camera module 100 shown in FIG37 in a close-up working state during macro shooting.
示例性地,第二镜头3可以包括自物侧至像侧依次排列的第一透镜L1和第二透镜L2。第一透镜L1可以具有正光焦度,第一透镜L1可以包括物侧面S1和像侧面S2。第二透镜L2可以具有负光焦度,第二透镜L2可以包括物侧面S3和像侧面S4。For example, the second lens system 3 may include a first lens L1 and a second lens L2, arranged sequentially from the object side to the image side. The first lens L1 may have positive refractive power and may include an object-side surface S1 and an image-side surface S2. The second lens L2 may have negative refractive power and may include an object-side surface S3 and an image-side surface S4.
示例性地,第一镜头2可以具有负光焦度,第二镜头可以包括第三透镜L3。第三透镜L3可以具有负光焦度,第三透镜L3可以包括物侧面S5和像侧面S6。For example, the first lens element 2 may have negative optical power, the second lens element may include a third lens element L3, the third lens element L3 may have negative optical power, and the third lens element L3 may include an object-side surface S5 and an image-side surface S6.
示例性地,第一透镜L1可以为塑料材质,第二透镜L2可以为塑料材质,第三透镜L3可以为塑料材质。在其他的实施例中,第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3可以均为玻璃材质,或者既包括玻璃材质又有塑料材质,本申请对此不作限定。For example, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 can be made of plastic. In other embodiments, the first lens L1, the second lens L2, and the third lens L3 can all be made of glass, or a combination of glass and plastic, which is not limited in this application.
示例性地,棱镜41可以包括入射面S7、第一反射面S8、第二反射面S9、第三反射面S10和出射面S11。第一反射面S8可以为棱镜41的第一侧面413的一部分,第二反射面S9可以为棱镜41的第一表面411的一部分,第三反射面S10可以为棱镜41的第二侧面414的一部分。入射面S7、第二反射面S9与出射面S11可以均位于同一表面,且入射面S7、第二反射面S9与出射面S11中三者之间任意相邻的两个面可以至少有部分重叠。示例性地,光线既能够从入射面S7和第二反射面S9的重叠区域透射进棱镜41,光线也能够在入射面S7和第二反射面S9重叠区域被反射。在其他的实施方式中,入射面S7、第二反射面S9与出射面S11也可以不共面,入射面S7、第二反射面S9和出射面S11中相邻的两个面也可以不重叠,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the prism 41 may include an incident surface S7, a first reflective surface S8, a second reflective surface S9, a third reflective surface S10, and an exit surface S11. The first reflective surface S8 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41, the second reflective surface S9 may be a portion of the first surface 411 of the prism 41, and the third reflective surface S10 may be a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41. The incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may all be located on the same surface, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may at least partially overlap. Exemplarily, light can be transmitted into the prism 41 from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9, and light can also be reflected from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9. In other embodiments, the incident surface S7, the second reflection surface S9 and the exit surface S11 may not be coplanar, and two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflection surface S9 and the exit surface S11 may not overlap, which is not specifically limited in this application.
示例性地,经过第二镜头3射出的光线到达图像传感器51之前可在棱镜41内反射折叠三次。来自第二镜头3的光线经过第三透镜L3之后可穿过入射面S7进入棱镜41。在第一反射面S8处反射穿过入射面S7的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第一次被反射;在第二反射面S9处反射从第一反射面S8反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第二次被反射;在第三反射面S10处反射从第二反射面S9反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第三次被反射,以使至少部分光线穿过出射面S11射出棱镜41至图像传感器51。For example, light emitted from the second lens 3 may be reflected and folded three times within the prism 41 before reaching the image sensor 51. After passing through the third lens L3, the light from the second lens 3 may pass through the incident surface S7 and enter the prism 41. At least a portion of the light that passed through the incident surface S7 is reflected at the first reflection surface S8, undergoing a first reflection. At least a portion of the light reflected from the first reflection surface S8 is reflected at the second reflection surface S9, undergoing a second reflection. Finally, at least a portion of the light reflected from the second reflection surface S9 is reflected at the third reflection surface S10, undergoing a third reflection. This allows at least a portion of the light to pass through the exit surface S11 and exit the prism 41 to the image sensor 51.
示例性地,棱镜41的横截面可以大致为等腰梯形。第一反射面S8和第三反射面S10可以为等腰梯形的两个腰。入射面S7与第一反射面S8之间的夹角可以为33°,第三反射面S10与出射面S11之间的夹角可以为33°。在其他的实施例中,棱镜41可以为三角形、四边形棱镜或其他能够折叠光路的元件,棱镜41的入射面S7与第一反射面S8之间的夹角或第三反射面S10与出射面S11之间的夹角也可以为30°或45°等,本申请对此均不作限定。For example, the cross-section of the prism 41 can be roughly an isosceles trapezoid. The first reflecting surface S8 and the third reflecting surface S10 can be the two waists of the isosceles trapezoid. The angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 can be 33°, and the angle between the third reflecting surface S10 and the exit surface S11 can be 33°. In other embodiments, the prism 41 can be a triangular prism, a quadrilateral prism or other element capable of folding the light path, and the angle between the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 and the first reflecting surface S8 or the angle between the third reflecting surface S10 and the exit surface S11 can also be 30° or 45°, etc., which are not limited in this application.
此外,滤光片52可以包括物侧面S12和像侧面S13。成像面S14位于第一镜头2的像侧,成像面S14可以为光线依次穿过第二镜头3和第一镜头2中的各个透镜后形成像的载面。图像传感器51位于成像面S14处。Furthermore, the filter 52 may include an object-side surface S12 and an image-side surface S13. An imaging surface S14 is located on the image side of the first lens 2. This imaging surface S14 may be the surface on which an image is formed after light sequentially passes through the second lens 3 and each lens in the first lens 2. The image sensor 51 is located on the imaging surface S14.
示例性地,第一镜头2和第二镜头3可以位于棱镜41的同一侧。摄像模组100由远景状态切换至微距状态时,第二镜头3可以沿着光轴向像侧移动,第一镜头2保持不动,以增大第一镜头2与第二镜头3之间的间距,实现对焦。For example, the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 can be located on the same side of the prism 41. When the camera module 100 switches from the telephoto state to the macro state, the second lens 3 can move along the optical axis toward the image side, while the first lens 2 remains stationary, so as to increase the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 and achieve focusing.
参见表1a,表1a是第一种实施例中的摄像模组100在无穷远工作状态时的各透镜和滤光片52的曲率半径、厚度、折射率、阿贝数。阿贝数也即色散系数。其中,OBJ表示摄像模组100的物侧面。See Table 1a, which shows the radius of curvature, thickness, refractive index, and Abbe number of each lens and filter 52 in the camera module 100 of the first embodiment when operating at infinity. The Abbe number is also known as the dispersion coefficient. OBJ represents the object-side surface of the camera module 100.
表1a
Table 1a
请参见表1b,表1b是第一种实施例的摄像模组100的各透镜的非球面系数。Please refer to Table 1b, which shows the aspheric coefficients of each lens of the camera module 100 of the first embodiment.
表1b
Table 1b
其中,A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14和A16等符号表示非球面系数。需要说明的是,表格中的各参数为科学计数法表示。例如,1.365E-06是指1.365×10-6。需要说明的是,本申请中A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14和A16等符号在后续再次出现时,除非有另外的解释,否则表示的意思与此处相同,后续不再赘述。Among them, symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 , and A 16 represent aspheric coefficients. It should be noted that the parameters in the table are expressed in scientific notation. For example, 1.365E-06 means 1.365×10 -6 . It should be noted that when symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 , and A 16 appear again in this application, unless otherwise explained, they have the same meaning as here and will not be repeated here.
在本实施例中,第一透镜L1至第三透镜L3的物侧面和像侧面均为非球面,可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定:
In this embodiment, the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of the first lens L1 to the third lens L3 are all aspherical surfaces, which can be defined by, but not limited to, the following aspherical surface formula:
其中z(x,y)是光学表面矢高;k为圆锥系数;c为曲率半径;r为光轴方向的半径高度;r2=x2+y2;αi是多项式系数;ri是标准化径向坐标,A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14和A16为非球面系数。Where z(x,y) is the sag of the optical surface; k is the cone coefficient; c is the radius of curvature; r is the radius height in the direction of the optical axis; r 2 =x 2 +y 2 ; α i is the polynomial coefficient; ri is the normalized radial coordinate, and A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 are aspheric coefficients.
请参阅表1c,表1c是图37所示摄像模组100在物距为无穷远时的基本参数。f21为第二镜头3中的第一透镜L1的焦距,f22为第二镜头3中的第二透镜L2的焦距。Please refer to Table 1c, which shows the basic parameters of the camera module 100 shown in FIG37 when the object distance is infinite. f21 is the focal length of the first lens L1 in the second lens 3, and f22 is the focal length of the second lens L2 in the second lens 3.
表1c
Table 1c
可以理解的是,摄像模组100由远景切换到近景时,例如切换到微距68mm处,第一镜头2和第二镜头3之间的间距增大,第二镜头3的对焦行程为1.43mm,对焦行程短,对焦效果好,能够实现良好的微距拍摄效果。在本实施方式中,EFL为17.2mm,Fno为2.6,FOV为25°,摄像模组100具有长焦、大光圈的特征。It is understood that when the camera module 100 switches from a telephoto to a close-up, for example, to a macro distance of 68mm, the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 increases, and the focus stroke of the second lens 3 is 1.43mm. This short focus stroke provides good focusing effect, enabling excellent macro photography. In this embodiment, the EFL is 17.2mm, the Fno is 2.6, and the FOV is 25°, and the camera module 100 has the characteristics of a telephoto lens and a large aperture.
第二种实施例:请参阅图39和图40,图39是本申请第二种实施例提供的摄像模组100在物距为无穷远时的远景工作状态时的结构示意图。图40是图39所示的摄像模组100在微距拍摄时的近景工作状态时的结构示意图。Second embodiment: Please refer to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the camera module 100 provided in the second embodiment of the present application in the long-range working state when the object distance is infinite. Figure 40 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 39 in the close-range working state during macro shooting.
示例性地,第二镜头3可以具有正光焦度。第二镜头3可以包括自物侧至像侧依次排列的第一透镜L1和第二透镜L2。第一透镜L1可以具有正光焦度,第一透镜L1可以包括物侧面S1和像侧面S2。第二透镜L2可以具有负光焦度,第二透镜L2可以包括物侧面S3和像侧面S4。For example, the second lens element 3 may have positive optical power. The second lens element 3 may include a first lens element L1 and a second lens element L2, arranged sequentially from the object side to the image side. The first lens element L1 may have positive optical power and may include an object-side surface S1 and an image-side surface S2. The second lens element L2 may have negative optical power and may include an object-side surface S3 and an image-side surface S4.
示例性地,第一镜头2可以具有负光焦度,第二镜头可以包括第三透镜L3。第三透镜L3可以具有负光焦度,第三透镜L3可以包括物侧面S5和像侧面S6。For example, the first lens element 2 may have negative optical power, the second lens element may include a third lens element L3, the third lens element L3 may have negative optical power, and the third lens element L3 may include an object-side surface S5 and an image-side surface S6.
示例性地,棱镜41可以包括入射面S7、第一反射面S8、第二反射面S9、第三反射面S10、第四反射面S15、第五反射面S16和出射面S11。第一反射面S8可以为棱镜41的第一侧面413的一部分,第二反射面S9和第四反射面S15可以为棱镜41的第一表面411的一部分,第三反射面S10可以为棱镜41的第 二表面412的一部分,第五反射面S16可以为棱镜41的第二侧面414的一部分。入射面S7、第二反射面S9、第四反射面S15和出射面S11可以均位于一个表面,且入射面S7、第二反射面S9、第四反射面S15和出射面S11四个面之间任意相邻的两个面可以至少有部分重叠。示例性的,入射面S7和第二反射面S9可以共面,且入射面S7和第二反射面S9可以有一部分是重叠的,光学既能够从入射面S7和第二反射面S9的重叠区域透射进棱镜41,光线也能够在入射面S7和第二反射面S9重叠区域被反射。其他实施方式中,入射面S7、第二反射面S9、第四反射面S15和出射面S11也可以不共面,入射面S7、第二反射面S9和出射面S11中相邻的两个面也可以不重叠,本申请对此不做限定。For example, the prism 41 may include an incident surface S7, a first reflective surface S8, a second reflective surface S9, a third reflective surface S10, a fourth reflective surface S15, a fifth reflective surface S16, and an exit surface S11. The first reflective surface S8 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41, the second reflective surface S9 and the fourth reflective surface S15 may be a portion of the first surface 411 of the prism 41, and the third reflective surface S10 may be a portion of the first side surface 413 of the prism 41. The fifth reflective surface S16 may be a portion of the second surface 412, and the fifth reflective surface S16 may be a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41. The incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may all be located on one surface, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may at least partially overlap. For example, the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9 may be coplanar, and the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9 may partially overlap, so that light can be transmitted into the prism 41 from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9, and light can also be reflected from the overlapping area of the incident surface S7 and the second reflective surface S9. In other embodiments, the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, the fourth reflective surface S15, and the exit surface S11 may not be coplanar, and any two adjacent surfaces among the incident surface S7, the second reflective surface S9, and the exit surface S11 may not overlap, and this application is not limited to this.
示例性地,经过第二镜头3射出的光线到达图像传感器51之前可在棱镜41内反射折叠五次。来自第二镜头3的光线经过第三透镜L3之后可穿过出射面S7进入棱镜41。在第一反射面S8处反射穿过入射面S7的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第一次被反射;在第二反射面S9处反射从第一反射面S8反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第二次被反射;在第三反射面S10处反射从第二反射面S9反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第三次被反射;在第四反射面S15处反射从第三反射面S10反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第四次被反射;在第五反射面S16处反射从第四反射面S15反射的光线中的至少部分光线,光线第五次被反射,以使至少一部分光线穿过出射面S11射出棱镜41至图像传感器51。For example, light emitted through the second lens 3 may be reflected and folded five times within the prism 41 before reaching the image sensor 51. After passing through the third lens L3, the light from the second lens 3 may pass through the exit surface S7 and enter the prism 41. At least a portion of the light that passed through the incident surface S7 is reflected at the first reflection surface S8, resulting in a first reflection. At least a portion of the light reflected from the first reflection surface S8 is reflected at the second reflection surface S9, resulting in a second reflection. At least a portion of the light reflected from the second reflection surface S9 is reflected at the third reflection surface S10, resulting in a third reflection. At least a portion of the light reflected from the third reflection surface S10 is reflected at the fourth reflection surface S15, resulting in a fourth reflection. Finally, at least a portion of the light reflected from the fourth reflection surface S15 is reflected at the fifth reflection surface S16, resulting in at least a portion of the light being emitted from the prism 41 through the exit surface S11 and reaching the image sensor 51.
示例性地,棱镜41的横截面可以大致为等腰梯形。第一反射面S8和第五反射面S16可以为等腰梯形的两个腰。入射面S7与第一反射面S8之间的夹角可以为30°,第五反射面S16与出射面S11之间的夹角可以为30°。其他实施例中,棱镜41的入射面S7与第一反射面S8之间的夹角或第五反射面S16与出射面S11之间的夹角可以为36°或45°等,本申请对此均不作限定。For example, the cross-section of the prism 41 can be roughly an isosceles trapezoid. The first reflecting surface S8 and the fifth reflecting surface S16 can be the two waists of the isosceles trapezoid. The angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 can be 30°, and the angle between the fifth reflecting surface S16 and the exit surface S11 can be 30°. In other embodiments, the angle between the incident surface S7 and the first reflecting surface S8 of the prism 41 or the angle between the fifth reflecting surface S16 and the exit surface S11 can be 36° or 45°, etc., which are not limited in this application.
此外,滤光片52可以包括物侧面S12和像侧面S13。成像面S14位于摄像模组100的像侧,成像面S14为光线依次穿过第二镜头3和第一镜头2中的各个透镜后形成像的载面。图像传感器51位于成像面S14处。Furthermore, the filter 52 may include an object-side surface S12 and an image-side surface S13. An imaging surface S14 is located on the image side of the camera module 100. This surface is where light forms an image after passing through each lens in the second lens 3 and the first lens 2. The image sensor 51 is located on the imaging surface S14.
在本实施例中,第二镜头3和图像传感器51位于棱镜41的同一侧,摄像模组100由远景状态切换至微距状态时,第二镜头3可以沿着光轴向摄像模组100的物侧移动,第一镜头2保持不动,实现对焦。In this embodiment, the second lens 3 and the image sensor 51 are located on the same side of the prism 41. When the camera module 100 switches from the telephoto state to the macro state, the second lens 3 can move along the optical axis toward the object side of the camera module 100, and the first lens 2 remains stationary to achieve focusing.
参见表2a,表2a是第二种实施例中的摄像模组100在无穷远工作状态时的各透镜和滤光片52的曲率半径、厚度、折射率、阿贝数。阿贝数也即色散系数。其中,OBJ表示摄像模组100的物侧面。See Table 2a, which shows the radius of curvature, thickness, refractive index, and Abbe number of each lens and filter 52 in the second embodiment of the camera module 100 when operating at infinity. The Abbe number is also known as the dispersion coefficient. OBJ represents the object-side surface of the camera module 100.
表2a
Table 2a
请参见表2b,表2b是第二种实施例的摄像模组100的各透镜的非球面系数。 Please refer to Table 2b, which shows the aspheric coefficients of each lens of the camera module 100 of the second embodiment.
表2b
Table 2b
其中,A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14和A16等符号表示非球面系数。Here, symbols such as A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 represent aspheric coefficients.
在本实施例中,第一透镜L1至第三透镜L3的物侧面和像侧面均为非球面,可利用但不限于以下非球面公式进行限定:
In this embodiment, the object-side surfaces and image-side surfaces of the first lens L1 to the third lens L3 are all aspherical surfaces, which can be defined by, but not limited to, the following aspherical surface formula:
其中z(x,y)是光学表面矢高;k为圆锥系数;c为曲率半径;r为光轴方向的半径高度;r2=x2+y2;αi是多项式系数;ri是标准化径向坐标,A4、A6、A8、A10、A12、A14和A16为非球面系数。Where z(x,y) is the sag of the optical surface; k is the cone coefficient; c is the radius of curvature; r is the radius height in the direction of the optical axis; r 2 =x 2 +y 2 ; α i is the polynomial coefficient; ri is the normalized radial coordinate, and A 4 , A 6 , A 8 , A 10 , A 12 , A 14 and A 16 are aspheric coefficients.
请参阅表2c,表2c是图39所示摄像模组100在无穷远时的基本参数。Please refer to Table 2c, which shows the basic parameters of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 39 at infinity.
表2c
Table 2c
在本实施例中,摄像模组100由远景切换到近景时,例如切换到微距100mm处,第一镜头2和第二镜头3之间的间距增大,第二镜头3的对焦行程为1.63mm,对焦行程短,对焦效果好,能够实现良好的微距拍摄效果。在本实施方式中,EFL为26mm,Fno为3.4,FOV为17°,摄像模组100具有长焦、大光圈的特征。In this embodiment, when the camera module 100 switches from a telephoto lens to a close-up lens, for example, to a macro lens of 100mm, the distance between the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 increases, and the focus stroke of the second lens 3 is 1.63mm. This short focus stroke provides excellent focusing and enables excellent macro photography. In this embodiment, the EFL is 26mm, the Fno is 3.4, and the FOV is 17°, indicating that the camera module 100 has the characteristics of a telephoto lens and a large aperture.
上文结合相关附图介绍了一些实施方式中的摄像模组100及其光学参数,下面将再结合相关附图介绍其他的一些实施方式中的摄像模组100的结构。可以理解的是前文所示意的马达1的相关设计,在不冲突的情况下也可以直接应用至下文所示意的马达1的结构设计中。此外,与前文所示意的马达1的大部分相同的技术内容,下文将不再赘述。The above descriptions, combined with the accompanying drawings, describe the camera module 100 and its optical parameters in some embodiments. The following descriptions will further describe the structure of the camera module 100 in other embodiments, combined with the accompanying drawings. It is understood that the design of the motor 1 illustrated above can be directly applied to the structural design of the motor 1 illustrated below, unless there is a conflict. Furthermore, most of the technical content that is identical to the motor 1 illustrated above will not be repeated below.
图41是图3所示的摄像模组100在另一种实施方式的结构示意图。图42是图41所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构分解图。Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 42 is a partial exploded view of the structure of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 41 in one embodiment.
如图41和图42所示,摄像模组100的马达1包括防抖模块1b和对焦模块1c。在本实施方式中,马达1的防抖模块1b可以包括基座11、第三连接件133、滚动件134、防抖驱动机构14以及防抖支架16。其中,防抖驱动机构14包括第一防抖线圈141、第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143以及第二防抖磁性件144。第一防抖线圈141与第一防抖磁性件142对应设置,形成一组驱动机构,第二防抖线圈143与第二防抖磁性件144对应设置,形成另一组驱动机构。As shown in Figures 41 and 42, the motor 1 of the camera module 100 includes an anti-shake module 1b and a focus module 1c. In this embodiment, the anti-shake module 1b of the motor 1 may include a base 11, a third connecting member 133, a rolling member 134, an anti-shake drive mechanism 14, and an anti-shake bracket 16. The anti-shake drive mechanism 14 includes a first anti-shake coil 141, a first anti-shake magnetic member 142, a second anti-shake coil 143, and a second anti-shake magnetic member 144. The first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 are arranged in correspondence to form a drive mechanism, and the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 are arranged in correspondence to form another drive mechanism.
图43是图42所示的基座11在一种实施方式的结构放大示意图。FIG43 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the base 11 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
如图43所示,基座11包括多个第一滚动槽114,例如,第一滚动槽114的数量可以为三个。示例性地,三个第一滚动槽114可以分别位于基座11的第一角部1111、第二角部1112以及第三角部1113。基座11的三个第一凹槽113的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X,也可以平行于第二方向Y。这样,第一凹槽113可以沿X-Y平面延伸。As shown in Figure 43, the base 11 includes a plurality of first rolling grooves 114. For example, there can be three first rolling grooves 114. For example, the three first rolling grooves 114 can be located at a first corner 1111, a second corner 1112, and a third corner 1113 of the base 11, respectively. The three first grooves 113 of the base 11 can extend parallel to the first direction X or the second direction Y. Thus, the first grooves 113 can extend along the X-Y plane.
图44是图42所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图一。FIG44 is a partial structural assembly diagram 1 of the motor 1 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
如图44所示,滚动件134可以活动连接于基座11。示例性地,多个滚动件134可以一一对应地位于基座11的多个第一滚动槽114。As shown in Figure 44, the rolling element 134 can be movably connected to the base 11. For example, the plurality of rolling elements 134 can be located in the plurality of first rolling grooves 114 of the base 11 in a one-to-one correspondence.
可以理解的是,滚动件134可以为滚珠结构,使得滚动件134可以在第一滚动槽114内相对基座11沿X-Y平面的任意方向运动。It can be understood that the rolling element 134 can be a ball structure, so that the rolling element 134 can move in any direction along the X-Y plane relative to the base 11 in the first rolling groove 114.
示例性地,第一防抖线圈141、第二防抖线圈143、第一防抖传感器145以及第二防抖传感器146均可以固定连接于基座11,并电连接于基座11。 Illustratively, the first anti-shake coil 141 , the second anti-shake coil 143 , the first anti-shake sensor 145 , and the second anti-shake sensor 146 may all be fixedly connected to the base 11 and electrically connected to the base 11 .
图45是图42所示的防抖支架16在一种实施方式的结构示意图。图46是图45所示的防抖支架16在另一种角度的结构示意图。Figure 45 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Figure 42 in one embodiment. Figure 46 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the anti-shake bracket 16 shown in Figure 45 at another angle.
如图45和图46所示,示例性地,防抖支架16的底板161连接于防抖支架16的侧板162。侧板162围绕防抖支架16的安装孔16a设置。45 and 46 , illustratively, the bottom plate 161 of the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the side plate 162 of the anti-shake bracket 16 . The side plate 162 is disposed around the mounting hole 16 a of the anti-shake bracket 16 .
示例性地,防抖支架16包括多个第二滚动槽165,第二滚动槽165的数量可以为三个。示例性地,防抖支架16的三个第四凹槽164的横截面可以大致呈圆形。For example, the anti-shake bracket 16 includes a plurality of second rolling grooves 165 , and the number of the second rolling grooves 165 may be three. For example, the cross-sections of the three fourth grooves 164 of the anti-shake bracket 16 may be substantially circular.
图47是图41所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图。图48是图47所示的摄像模组100在J-J线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 47 is a partial structural assembly diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 41 in one embodiment. Figure 48 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line J-J in one embodiment.
如图47和图48所示,防抖支架16可以活动连接于基座11。示例性地,防抖支架16的三个第二滚动槽165一一对应基座11的三个第一滚动槽114设置。其中,安装于第一滚动槽114的滚动件134可以至少部分嵌入第二滚动槽165中。此时,防抖支架16的通过多个滚动件134连接于基座11。As shown in Figures 47 and 48, the anti-shake bracket 16 can be movably connected to the base 11. For example, the three second rolling grooves 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 correspond one-to-one to the three first rolling grooves 114 of the base 11. The rolling elements 134 installed in the first rolling grooves 114 can at least partially fit into the second rolling grooves 165. In this case, the anti-shake bracket 16 is connected to the base 11 via the multiple rolling elements 134.
示例性地,滚动件134可以在第一滚动槽114内沿第一方向X和/或第二方向Y滚动,防抖支架16的第二滚动槽165可以对滚动件134进行限位。可以理解的是,防抖支架16和滚动件134可以一起相对基座11在X-Y平面上沿任意方向运动,防抖支架16与基座11之间的相对运动能够更加可控。在其他的实施方式中,通过改变第一滚动槽114和第二滚动槽165的形状和大小,第一滚动槽114可以对滚动件134进行限位,滚动件134可以在第一凹槽113内沿第一方向X和/或第二方向Y运动。For example, the rolling element 134 can roll within the first rolling groove 114 in the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, and the second rolling groove 165 of the anti-shake bracket 16 can limit the rolling element 134. It is understood that the anti-shake bracket 16 and the rolling element 134 can move together in any direction in the X-Y plane relative to the base 11, making the relative movement between the anti-shake bracket 16 and the base 11 more controllable. In other embodiments, by changing the shape and size of the first rolling groove 114 and the second rolling groove 165, the first rolling groove 114 can limit the rolling element 134, allowing the rolling element 134 to move within the first groove 113 in the first direction X and/or the second direction Y.
图49是图47所示的摄像模组100在K-K线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。图50是图47所示的摄像模组100在L-L线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 49 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line K-K. Figure 50 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 47 at line L-L.
如图49和图50所示,示例性地,第一防抖线圈141与第一防抖磁性件142对应设置,用于驱动防抖支架16相对基座11沿第一方向X运动。第一防抖传感器145可以用于检测防抖支架16在第一方向X上的位置变化。As shown in Figures 49 and 50 , for example, the first anti-shake coil 141 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 142 are correspondingly provided to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X. The first anti-shake sensor 145 can be used to detect position changes of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the first direction X.
示例性地,第二防抖线圈143与第二防抖磁性件144对应设置,用于驱动防抖支架16相对基座11沿第二方向Y运动。第二防抖传感器146可以用于检测防抖支架16在第二方向Y上的位置变化。Illustratively, the second anti-shake coil 143 is correspondingly provided with the second anti-shake magnetic member 144 to drive the anti-shake bracket 16 to move relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y. The second anti-shake sensor 146 can be used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 16 in the second direction Y.
示例性地,第一镜头2可以固定连接于防抖支架16。防抖支架16可以带动第一镜头2在X-Y平面上沿任意方向运动。For example, the first lens 2 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 16. The anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane.
示例性地,对焦支架21可以活动连接于防抖支架16。第二镜头3可以固定连接于对焦支架21。防抖支架16可以带动对焦支架21和第二镜头3在X-Y平面上沿任意方向运动。For example, the focus bracket 21 can be movably connected to the anti-shake bracket 16. The second lens 3 can be fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21. The anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the focus bracket 21 and the second lens 3 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane.
可以理解的是,在第一防抖线圈141、第一防抖磁性件142、第二防抖线圈143以及第二防抖磁性件144的作用下,防抖支架16可以带动第一镜头2和第二镜头3相对基座11在X-Y平面上沿任意方向运动,从而抵消第一镜头2和第二镜头3在X-Y平面产生的抖动行程,实现摄像模组100的光学图像防抖,提高摄像模组100的成像质量。It can be understood that under the action of the first anti-shake coil 141, the first anti-shake magnetic part 142, the second anti-shake coil 143 and the second anti-shake magnetic part 144, the anti-shake bracket 16 can drive the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 to move in any direction on the X-Y plane relative to the base 11, thereby offsetting the shaking stroke generated by the first lens 2 and the second lens 3 in the X-Y plane, realizing optical image stabilization of the camera module 100, and improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
如图50所示,示例性地,对焦线圈221面向对焦磁性件222设置,用于驱动对焦支架21相对防抖支架16沿第三方向Z运动。对焦传感器24可以用于检测对焦支架21在第三方向Z上的位置变化。50 , illustratively, the focus coil 221 is disposed facing the focus magnetic member 222 to drive the focus bracket 21 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 16 along the third direction Z. The focus sensor 24 can be used to detect position changes of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z.
可以理解的是,对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222可以驱动对焦支架21沿第三方向Z运动,从而带动第二镜头3沿第三方向Z运动,进而实现摄像模组100的自动对焦。It is understandable that the focusing coil 221 and the focusing magnetic member 222 can drive the focusing bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, thereby driving the second lens 3 to move along the third direction Z, thereby realizing automatic focusing of the camera module 100.
可以理解的是,相较于防抖支架16通过第二连接件132、导向支架15以及第一连接件131活动连接于基座11的方案,防抖支架16通过滚动件134活动连接于基座11的方案的结构更加简单,从而实现马达1和摄像模组100的小型化设置。It can be understood that compared with the solution in which the anti-shake bracket 16 is movably connected to the base 11 through the second connecting member 132, the guide bracket 15 and the first connecting member 131, the solution in which the anti-shake bracket 16 is movably connected to the base 11 through the rolling member 134 has a simpler structure, thereby realizing the miniaturization of the motor 1 and the camera module 100.
图51是图42所示的马达1在一种实施方式的部分结构组装图二。FIG51 is a second partial structural assembly diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG42 in one embodiment.
如图51所示,压件17可以固定连接于防抖支架16的背向基座11的一侧。示例性地,压件17可以固定于侧板162。压件17可以在第三方向Z上限制对焦支架21的运动行程,以防止对焦支架21脱离防抖支架16。As shown in FIG51 , the pressing member 17 can be fixedly connected to the side of the anti-shake bracket 16 facing away from the base 11. For example, the pressing member 17 can be fixed to the side plate 162. The pressing member 17 can limit the movement of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z to prevent the focus bracket 21 from separating from the anti-shake bracket 16.
请结合图41所示,示例性地,外壳18可以与基座11的形状相适配,外壳18可以罩设在基座11上。外壳18可以通过胶粘等方式与基座11固定连接。外壳18可以与基座11组装配合,共同封装和保护马达1的内部结构。Referring to FIG. 41 , for example, housing 18 can be configured to match the shape of base 11 and can be positioned over base 11. Housing 18 can be fixedly connected to base 11 by gluing or other methods. Housing 18 can be assembled with base 11 to encapsulate and protect the internal structure of motor 1.
可以理解的是,马达1与第一镜头2、第二镜头3、棱镜组件4以及图像传感器组件5的位置关系、连接关系以及运动关系等,均可以参阅马达1与第一镜头2、第二镜头3、棱镜组件4以及图像传感器组件5的位置关系、连接关系以及运动关系等。具体地这里不再赘述。It is understood that the positional relationship, connection relationship, and motion relationship between the motor 1 and the first lens 2, the second lens 3, the prism assembly 4, and the image sensor assembly 5 can all be referred to in the positional relationship, connection relationship, and motion relationship between the motor 1 and the first lens 2, the second lens 3, the prism assembly 4, and the image sensor assembly 5. The details are not repeated here.
可以理解的是,相比起包括基座11、马达电路板12、第一连接件131、第二连接件132、第三连接件 133、防抖驱动机构14、导向支架15以及防抖支架16的防抖模块1b,包括基座11、第三连接件133、滚动件134、防抖驱动机构14以及防抖支架16的防抖模块1b的结构更加简单,马达1的体积更小,能够进一步实现摄像模组100的小型化设置。It is understandable that, compared to the base 11, the motor circuit board 12, the first connecting member 131, the second connecting member 132, the third connecting member 133, the anti-shake drive mechanism 14, the guide bracket 15 and the anti-shake bracket 16. The anti-shake module 1b includes the base 11, the third connecting member 133, the rolling member 134, the anti-shake drive mechanism 14 and the anti-shake bracket 16. The structure of the anti-shake module 1b is simpler, the volume of the motor 1 is smaller, and the miniaturization setting of the camera module 100 can be further realized.
图52是图3所示的摄像模组100在另一种实施方式的结构示意图。图53是图52所示的摄像模组100在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。Fig. 52 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 53 is a schematic diagram of a partial decomposition of the camera module 100 shown in Fig. 52 in one embodiment.
如图52和图53所示,摄像模组100包括马达1、第一镜头2、第二镜头3、棱镜组件4和图像传感器组件5。可以理解的是,摄像模组100还可以包括更少或者更多的结构。例如,摄像模组100还可以包括可变光圈(附图中均未示出)。As shown in Figures 52 and 53, the camera module 100 includes a motor 1, a first lens 2, a second lens 3, a prism assembly 4, and an image sensor assembly 5. It is understood that the camera module 100 may also include fewer or more structures. For example, the camera module 100 may also include a variable aperture (not shown in the figures).
图54是图53所示的棱镜组件4在一种实施方式的部分分解示意图。FIG54 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the prism assembly 4 shown in FIG53 in one embodiment.
如图54所示,示例性地,棱镜41的横截面可以大致呈平行四边形。As shown in FIG. 54 , illustratively, the cross-section of the prism 41 may be substantially a parallelogram.
示例性地,棱镜41的第一表面411和棱镜41的第二表面412可以大致平行。棱镜41的第一侧面413和棱镜41的第二侧面414可以大致平行。For example, the first surface 411 of the prism 41 and the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel. The first side surface 413 of the prism 41 and the second side surface 414 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel.
示例性地,棱镜41的入射面S7可以位于棱镜41的第一表面411,第一表面411的一部分形成入射面S7。棱镜41的出射面S11可以位于棱镜41的第二表面412,第二表面412的一部分形成出射面S11。此时,入射面S7和出射面S11位于棱镜组件4的不同侧。For example, the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 may be located on the first surface 411 of the prism 41, with a portion of the first surface 411 forming the incident surface S7. The exit surface S11 of the prism 41 may be located on the second surface 412 of the prism 41, with a portion of the second surface 412 forming the exit surface S11. In this case, the incident surface S7 and the exit surface S11 are located on different sides of the prism assembly 4.
图55是图54所示的棱镜支架42在另一种角度的结构放大示意图。FIG55 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the structure of the prism bracket 42 shown in FIG54 at another angle.
如图54和图55所示,示例性地,棱镜支架42的第二安装部422可以凸设于第一安装部421。As shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 , illustratively, the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 may be protruded from the first mounting portion 421 .
示例性地,第一安装部421和第二安装部422所围成的空间可以构成棱镜支架42的容置空间423。容置空间的第一支撑面4231和第二支撑面4232可以呈夹角设置。For example, the space enclosed by the first mounting portion 421 and the second mounting portion 422 may constitute the accommodating space 423 of the prism holder 42. The first supporting surface 4231 and the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space may be arranged at an angle.
图56是图52所示的摄像模组100在M-M线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图一。Figure 56 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram 1 of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
如图56所示,棱镜41可以固定连接于棱镜支架42。此时,棱镜41位于棱镜支架42的容置空间423内。As shown in FIG56 , the prism 41 can be fixedly connected to the prism bracket 42 . At this time, the prism 41 is located in the accommodating space 423 of the prism bracket 42 .
示例性地,棱镜41的第二表面412可以与容置空间423的第一支撑面4231大致平行,且棱镜41的第二表面412可以与容置空间423的第二支撑面4232间隔设置。棱镜41的第一侧面413可以与容置空间423的第二支撑面4232大致平行,且棱镜41的第一侧面413可以与容置空间423的第二支撑面4232间隔设置。For example, the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the first supporting surface 4231 of the accommodating space 423, and the second surface 412 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423. The first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be substantially parallel to the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423, and the first side surface 413 of the prism 41 may be spaced apart from the second supporting surface 4232 of the accommodating space 423.
示例性地,棱镜组件4可以与马达1固定连接。示例性地,棱镜组件4的一部分可以伸入马达1的避让空间内。Exemplarily, the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to the motor 1. Exemplarily, a portion of the prism assembly 4 may extend into the avoidance space of the motor 1.
示例性地,马达1的基座11的一部分可以固定连接于棱镜支架42的第二安装部422。棱镜组件4的棱镜支架42的第一安装部421可以固定连接于基座11的远离防抖支架16的一侧。For example, a portion of the base 11 of the motor 1 may be fixedly connected to the second mounting portion 422 of the prism bracket 42 . The first mounting portion 421 of the prism bracket 42 of the prism assembly 4 may be fixedly connected to a side of the base 11 away from the anti-shake bracket 16 .
示例性地,棱镜41的出射面S11位于马达1的外部,且位于棱镜41的背向马达1的一侧。Exemplarily, the emission surface S11 of the prism 41 is located outside the motor 1 , and is located on the side of the prism 41 facing away from the motor 1 .
图57是图53的图像传感器组件在N-N线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图。Figure 57 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the image sensor assembly of Figure 53 at line N-N.
如图57所示,示例性地,图像传感器51可以固定于电路板54的第三板部543的朝向第一板部541的一侧。As shown in FIG. 57 , illustratively, the image sensor 51 may be fixed to a side of the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 that faces the first board portion 541 .
示例性地,滤光片支架53可以固定于电路板54的第三板部543。滤光片支架53与图像传感器51可以位于电路板54的第三板部543的同一侧。For example, the filter holder 53 may be fixed to the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 . The filter holder 53 and the image sensor 51 may be located on the same side of the third board portion 543 of the circuit board 54 .
示例性地,滤光片52固定连接于滤光片支架53。滤光片52可以位于滤光片支架53的贯穿孔531内。滤光片52还与图像传感器51相对设置。滤光片52可以用于过滤进入图像传感器51之前的光线中的红外光或者蓝光等,从而保证图像传感器51具有较佳的成像质量。Illustratively, the optical filter 52 is fixedly connected to the optical filter holder 53. The optical filter 52 can be located within the through hole 531 of the optical filter holder 53. The optical filter 52 is also disposed opposite the image sensor 51. The optical filter 52 can be used to filter infrared light or blue light from light before entering the image sensor 51, thereby ensuring that the image sensor 51 has better imaging quality.
图58是图52所示的摄像模组100在M-M线处的一种实施方式的部分剖面示意图二。Figure 58 is a second partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 52 at the M-M line.
如图58所示,棱镜组件4固定于电路板54的第一板部541,且一部分位于第一板部541与第三板部543之间。As shown in FIG. 58 , the prism assembly 4 is fixed to the first plate portion 541 of the circuit board 54 , and a portion thereof is located between the first plate portion 541 and the third plate portion 543 .
示例性地,棱镜支架42的第一安装部421固定于第一板部541。棱镜41的出射面S11与滤光片52相对设置。这样,光线在棱镜41内至少四次折转后射出,再经过滤光片52过滤后才会到达图像传感器51。For example, the first mounting portion 421 of the prism holder 42 is fixed to the first plate portion 541. The exit surface S11 of the prism 41 is disposed opposite the optical filter 52. Thus, light is refracted at least four times within the prism 41 before exiting and being filtered by the optical filter 52 before reaching the image sensor 51.
图像传感器组件5可以固定连接于棱镜组件4。示例性地,图像传感器组件5的滤光片支架53的一部分固定连接于棱镜组件4的棱镜支架42。电路板54的一部分固定连接于棱镜组件4的棱镜支架42,一部分固定连接于马达1的基座11。The image sensor assembly 5 can be fixedly connected to the prism assembly 4. For example, a portion of the filter holder 53 of the image sensor assembly 5 is fixedly connected to the prism holder 42 of the prism assembly 4. A portion of the circuit board 54 is fixedly connected to the prism holder 42 of the prism assembly 4, and a portion is fixedly connected to the base 11 of the motor 1.
示例性地,滤光片52可以与棱镜41的出射面S11相对设置,且覆盖出射面S11。此时,光线经过滤光片52过滤后才会到达图像传感器51。 For example, the filter 52 may be disposed opposite to and cover the exit surface S11 of the prism 41 , so that light can reach the image sensor 51 only after being filtered by the filter 52 .
示例性地,光线自第二镜头3进入摄像模组100的内部,再依次经过第一镜头2和棱镜41的入射面S7后进入棱镜41的内部。在进入棱镜41之后,光线可以依次在棱镜41的第一侧面413的一部分、第一表面411的一部分、第二表面412的一部分以及第二侧面414的一部分上进行反射,经过至少四次反射后的光线可以由棱镜41的出射面S11射出棱镜41,并通过滤光片52后到达图像传感器51,图像传感器51将光线所携带的图像信息转化为电信号,从而实现成像。For example, light enters the interior of the camera module 100 from the second lens 3, then passes through the first lens 2 and the incident surface S7 of the prism 41 in sequence before entering the interior of the prism 41. After entering the prism 41, the light can be reflected in sequence on a portion of the first side surface 413, a portion of the first surface 411, a portion of the second surface 412, and a portion of the second side surface 414 of the prism 41. After at least four reflections, the light can be emitted from the prism 41 through the exit surface S11 of the prism 41, and after passing through the filter 52, it reaches the image sensor 51. The image sensor 51 converts the image information carried by the light into an electrical signal, thereby realizing imaging.
可以理解的是,在进入棱镜41之后,光线能够在棱镜41的内部发生至少四次折转。这样,摄像模组100的光路行程较大,能够实现在长焦状态时的拍摄,从而提高摄像模组100在长焦状态下的成像质量。It is understood that after entering the prism 41, the light can be refracted at least four times inside the prism 41. In this way, the optical path of the camera module 100 is relatively large, which enables shooting in a telephoto state, thereby improving the imaging quality of the camera module 100 in the telephoto state.
可以理解的是,相比于设置船形棱镜41的方案,设置平行四边形棱镜41的方案能够使光线在棱镜41内进行至少四次折转,能够具有更长的总光路长度,长焦状态下的成像质量更高。It can be understood that, compared with the scheme of setting a boat-shaped prism 41, the scheme of setting a parallelogram prism 41 can make the light be refracted at least four times in the prism 41, can have a longer total optical path length, and can have higher imaging quality in the telephoto state.
需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请中的实施方式及实施方式中的特征可以相互组合,不同实施方式中的特征任意组合也在本申请的保护范围内,也就是说,上述描述的多个实施方式还可根据实际需要任意组合。It should be noted that, in the absence of conflict, the embodiments and features in the embodiments of this application can be combined with each other, and any combination of features in different embodiments is also within the scope of protection of this application. That is to say, the multiple embodiments described above can also be arbitrarily combined according to actual needs.
需要说明的是,上述所有附图均为本申请示例性地图示,并不代表产品实际大小。且附图中部件之间的尺寸比例关系也不作为对本申请实际产品的限定。以上,仅为本申请的部分实施方式和实施方式,本申请的保护范围不局限于此,任何熟知本领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。 It should be noted that all the above drawings are illustrative illustrations of this application and do not represent the actual size of the product. The dimensional ratio relationship between the components in the drawings does not serve as a limitation on the actual product of this application. The above are only some of the implementation methods and implementation methods of this application. The scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the technical scope disclosed in this application can easily think of changes or replacements, which should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the scope of protection of this application shall be based on the scope of protection of the claims.
Claims (24)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410453570.XA CN118945455A (en) | 2024-04-15 | 2024-04-15 | Camera modules and electronic equipment |
| CN202410453570.X | 2024-04-15 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025218019A1 true WO2025218019A1 (en) | 2025-10-23 |
Family
ID=93347023
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/102650 Pending WO2025218019A1 (en) | 2024-04-15 | 2024-06-28 | Camera module and electronic device |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN118945455A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025218019A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN118945455A (en) * | 2024-04-15 | 2024-11-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Camera modules and electronic equipment |
Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN112673295A (en) * | 2018-09-13 | 2021-04-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Ray path folding structure for imaging system and electronic device including the same |
| CN115327743A (en) * | 2022-07-01 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Optical imaging system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN115327747A (en) * | 2022-09-09 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Zoom optical system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN115327748A (en) * | 2022-09-09 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Optical imaging system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN117270151A (en) * | 2022-06-13 | 2023-12-22 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | Optical lens driving assembly and camera module thereof |
| CN117270146A (en) * | 2022-06-13 | 2023-12-22 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | Optical lens driving assembly and camera module thereof |
| CN118945455A (en) * | 2024-04-15 | 2024-11-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Camera modules and electronic equipment |
Family Cites Families (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2012013769A (en) * | 2010-06-29 | 2012-01-19 | Canon Inc | Imaging apparatus |
| JP5587096B2 (en) * | 2010-08-18 | 2014-09-10 | キヤノン株式会社 | Optical device |
| CN116736467A (en) * | 2020-04-10 | 2023-09-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Optical lens sets, camera modules and electronic equipment |
| CN116482837B (en) * | 2022-03-15 | 2024-02-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Long-focus lens, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN117590619B (en) * | 2023-02-15 | 2024-07-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | Motors, camera modules and electronic equipment |
| CN117596459B (en) * | 2023-09-18 | 2024-09-24 | 华为终端有限公司 | Camera modules and electronic equipment |
| CN117518404A (en) * | 2023-11-09 | 2024-02-06 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Optical imaging system, camera module and electronic equipment |
-
2024
- 2024-04-15 CN CN202410453570.XA patent/CN118945455A/en active Pending
- 2024-06-28 WO PCT/CN2024/102650 patent/WO2025218019A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN112673295A (en) * | 2018-09-13 | 2021-04-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Ray path folding structure for imaging system and electronic device including the same |
| CN117270151A (en) * | 2022-06-13 | 2023-12-22 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | Optical lens driving assembly and camera module thereof |
| CN117270146A (en) * | 2022-06-13 | 2023-12-22 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | Optical lens driving assembly and camera module thereof |
| CN115327743A (en) * | 2022-07-01 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Optical imaging system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN115327747A (en) * | 2022-09-09 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Zoom optical system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN115327748A (en) * | 2022-09-09 | 2022-11-11 | 昆山丘钛微电子科技股份有限公司 | Optical imaging system, camera module and electronic equipment |
| CN118945455A (en) * | 2024-04-15 | 2024-11-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Camera modules and electronic equipment |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN118945455A (en) | 2024-11-12 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN108254857B (en) | Optical imaging system and portable electronic device comprising same | |
| CN110888216A (en) | Optical lens, lens module and terminal | |
| CN115494629B (en) | Zoom lens, camera module and mobile terminal | |
| CN113544565B (en) | Zoom lens, camera module and mobile terminal | |
| WO2024098911A1 (en) | Optical lens, camera module, and electronic device | |
| WO2023174212A1 (en) | Long-focus lens, camera module and electronic device | |
| CN118311743B (en) | Optical system and periscope type camera module | |
| WO2022228189A1 (en) | Optical lens, camera module, and electronic device | |
| CN116088154B (en) | Zoom lenses, lens modules and electronic devices | |
| WO2024235154A1 (en) | Camera module and electronic device | |
| WO2025218019A1 (en) | Camera module and electronic device | |
| EP4141540B1 (en) | Camera module and mobile terminal | |
| CN118534626A (en) | Zoom lenses, camera modules and electronic devices | |
| CN119045171B (en) | Optical lens, camera module and electronic equipment | |
| WO2024120514A1 (en) | Telephoto lens, camera module, and electronic device | |
| WO2025082012A1 (en) | Imaging lens, camera module and electronic device | |
| KR102876967B1 (en) | Camera module and portable terminal | |
| CN119224985A (en) | Zoom lenses, camera modules and electronic devices | |
| CN119126353A (en) | Optical lenses, camera modules and electronic devices | |
| CN119224987B (en) | Optical lenses, camera modules and electronic equipment | |
| EP4332655A1 (en) | Optical system and camera module comprising same | |
| WO2025167229A1 (en) | Optical lens, camera module and electronic device | |
| WO2025168069A1 (en) | Optical lens, camera module and electronic device | |
| WO2025162039A1 (en) | Camera module and electronic device | |
| WO2025167964A1 (en) | Optical lens, camera module, and electronic device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24935552 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |